ES-62 ES-65
INSTRUCTION MANUAL
EASY STATION
ES-62
ES-65
1016312-01-B
HOW TO READ THIS MANUAL
Thank you for selecting the ES-62/65.
• Please read this Operator's manual carefully, before using this product.
• ES has a function to output data to a connected host computer. Command operations from a host computer
can also be performed. For details, refer to "Communication manual" and ask your local dealer.
• The specifications and general appearance of the instrument are subject to change without prior notice and
without obligation by TOPCON CORPORATION and may differ from those appearing in this manual.
• The content of this manual is subject to change without notice.
• Some of the diagrams shown in this manual may be simplified for easier understanding.
• Always keep this manual in a convenient location and read it when necessary.
• This manual is protected by copyright and all rights are reserved by TOPCON CORPORATION.
• Except as permitted by Copyright law, this manual may not be copied, and no part of this manual may be
reproduced in any form or by any means.
• This manual may not be modified, adapted or otherwise used for the production of derivative works.
Symbols
The following conventions are used in this manual.

: Indicates precautions and important items which should be read before operations.

: Indicates the chapter title to refer to for additional information.

: Indicates supplementary explanation.
Notes regarding manual style
•
•
•
•
•
Except where stated, “ES” means ES-62/65.
Screens and illustrations appearing in this manual are of ES-62.
Learn basic key operations in “BASIC OPERATION” before you read each measurement procedure.
For selecting options and inputting figures, see “Basic Key Operation” .
Measurement procedures are based on continuous measurement. Some information about procedures
when other measurement options are selected can be found in “Note” ().
• Bluetooth® is a registered trademark of Bluetooth SIG, Inc.
• KODAK is a registered trademark of Eastman Kodak Company.
• All other company and product names featured in this manual are trademarks or registered trademarks of
each respective organization.
Li-ion
S Li-ion
:This is the mark of the Japan Surveying Instruments Manufacturers Association.
i
PRECAUTIONS FOR SAFE OPERATION
For the safe use of the product and prevention of injury to operators and other persons as well as prevention of
property damage, items which should be observed are indicated by an exclamation point within a triangle used
with WARNING and CAUTION statements in this instruction manual.
The definitions of the indications are listed below. Be sure you understand them before reading the manual’s
main text.
Definition of Indication

WARNING
Ignoring this indication and making an operation error could possibly result in death
or serious injury to the operator.

CAUTION
Ignoring this indication and making an operation error could possibly result in minor injury
or property damage.

This symbol indicates items for which caution (hazard warnings inclusive) is urged. Specific details are
printed in or near the symbol.

This symbol indicates items which are prohibited.
Specific details are printed in or near the symbol.

This symbol indicates items which must always be performed.
Specific details are printed in or near the symbol.
General

Warning

Do not use the unit in areas exposed to high amounts of dust or ash, in areas where there is
inadequate ventilation, or near combustible materials. An explosion could occur.

Do not perform disassembly or rebuilding. Fire, electric shock, burns or hazardous radiation
exposure could result.

Never look at the sun through the telescope. Loss of eyesight could result.

Do not look at reflected sunlight from a prism or other reflecting object through the telescope. Loss
of eyesight could result.

Direct viewing of the sun using the telescope during sun observation will cause loss of eyesight. Use
solar filter (optional accessory) for sun observation.
 “21. SPECIAL ACCESSORIES”

When securing the instrument in the carrying case make sure that all catches, including the side
catches, are closed. Failure to do so could result in the instrument falling out while being carried,
causing injury.

Caution

Do not use the carrying case as a footstool. The case is slippery and unstable so a person could
slip and fall off it.

Do not place the instrument in a case with a damaged catch, belt or handle. The case or instrument
could be dropped and cause injury.

Do not wield or throw the plumb bob. A person could be injured if struck.

Secure handle to main unit with locking screws. Failure to properly secure the handle could result
in the unit falling off while being carried, causing injury.

Tighten the adjustment tribrach clamp securely. Failure to properly secure the clamp could result in
the tribrach falling off while being carried, causing injury.
ii
Power Supply

Warning

Do not place articles such as clothing on the battery charger while charging batteries. Sparks could
be induced, leading to fire.

Do not use batteries other than those designated. An explosion could occur, or abnormal heat
generated, leading to fire.

Do not use voltage other than the specified power supply voltage. Fire or electrical shock could
result.

Do not use damaged power cords, plugs or loose outlets. Fire or electric shock could result.

Do not use power cords other than those designated. Fire could result.

Use only the specified battery charger to recharge batteries. Other chargers may be of different
voltage rating or polarity, causing sparking which could lead to fire or burns.

Do not use the battery or charger for any other equipment or purpose. Fire or burns caused by
ignition could result.

Do not heat or throw batteries into fire. An explosion could occur, resulting in injury.

To prevent shorting of the battery in storage, apply insulating tape or equivalent to the terminals.
Otherwise shorting could occur resulting in fire or burns.

Do not use batteries or the battery charger if wet. Resultant shorting could lead to fire or burns.

Do not connect or disconnect power supply plugs with wet hands. Electric shock could result.

Caution

Do not touch liquid leaking from batteries. Harmful chemicals could cause burns or blisters.
Tripod

Caution

When mounting the instrument to the tripod, tighten the centering screw securely. Failure to tighten
the screw properly could result in the instrument falling off the tripod, causing injury.

Tighten securely the leg fixing screws of the tripod on which the instrument is mounted. Failure to
tighten the screws could result in the tripod collapsing, causing injury.

Do not carry the tripod with the tripod shoes pointed at other persons. A person could be injured if
struck by the tripod shoes.

Keep hands and feet away from the tripod shoes when fixing the tripod in the ground. A hand or foot
stab wound could result.

Tighten the leg fixing screws securely before carrying the tripod. Failure to tighten the screws could
lead to the tripod legs extending, causing injury.
iii
Bluetooth Wireless technology


Warning
Do not use within the vicinity of hospitals. Malfunction of medical equipment could result.

Use the instrument at a distance of at least 22 cm from anyone with a cardiac pacemaker.
Otherwise, the pacemaker may be adversely affected by the electromagnetic waves produced and
cease to operate as normal.

Do not use onboard aircraft. The aircraft instrumentation may malfunction as a result.

Do not use within the vicinity of automatic doors, fire alarms and other devices with automatic
controls as they may be adversely affected by the electromagnetic waves produced resulting in
malfunction and injury.
iv
PRECAUTIONS
Before starting work or operation, be sure to check that the instrument is functioning correctly with normal
performance.
Charging Battery
• Be sure to charge the battery within the charging temperature range.
Charging temperature range: 0 to 40°C
• Use only the specified battery or the battery charger. Failures caused by using other batteries or battery
chargers are out of warranty including the main unit.
Warranty policy for Battery
• Battery is an expendable item. The decline in retained capacity depending on the repeated charging/
discharging cycle is out of warranty.
Tribrach Clamp
• When the instrument is shipped, the tribrach clamp is held firmly in place
with a locking screw to prevent the instrument from shifting on the tribrachs.
Before using the instrument the first time, loosen this screw with a precision
screwdriver. And before transporting it, tighten the locking screw to fasten
the tribrach clamp in place so that it will not shift on the tribrachs.
Precautions concerning water and dust resistance
ES conforms to IP66 specifications for waterproofing and dust resistance when the battery cover and external interface
hatch are closed and connector caps are attached correctly.
• Be sure to close the battery cover and external interface hatch, and correctly attach the connector caps to
protect the ES from moisture and dust particles.
• Make sure that moisture or dust particles do not come in contact with the inside of the battery cover, terminal
or connectors. Contact with these parts may cause damage to the instrument.
• Make sure that the inside of the carrying case and the instrument are dry before closing the case. If moisture
is trapped inside the case, it may cause the instrument to rust.
• Do not press the speaker hole using something with a pointed tip. Doing so will damage an internal
waterproof sheet, resulting in a degraded waterproof property.
• If there is a crack or deformation in the rubber packing for the battery cover or external interface hatch, stop
using and replace the packing.
• To retain the waterproof property, it is recommended that you replace the rubber packing once every two
years. To replace the packing, contact your local dealer.
The Lithium Battery
• This instrument contains lithium battery. It lasts for approximately 5 years of normal use and storage
(Temperature = 20°C, humidity = about 50%), but its lifetime may be shorter depending on circumstances. To
replace the lithium battery, contact your local dealer.
Vertical and horizontal clamps
• Always fully release the vertical/horizontal clamps when rotating the instrument or telescope. Rotating with
clamp(s) partially applied may adversely affect accuracy.
v
Carrying case
• When using the carrying strap, be sure to attach the both hooks to the
attachment holes on the carrying case.
Backing up data
• Data should be backed up (transfered to an external device etc.) on a regular basis to prevent data loss.
Other precautions
• Close the external interface hatch before starting measurement. Otherwise, ambient light entering the USB
port may adversely affect measurement results.
• If the ES is moved from a warm place to an extremely cold place, internal parts may contract and make the
keys difficult to operate. This is caused by cold air trapped inside the hermetically sealed casing. If the keys
do not depress, open the battery cover to resume normal functionality. To prevent the keys from becoming
stiff, remove the connector caps before moving the ES to a cold place.
• Never place the ES directly on the ground. Sand or dust may cause damage to the screw holes or the
centering screw on the base plate.
• Do not aim the telescope directly at the sun. Also, attach the lens cap to the telescope when not in use. Use
the Solar filter to avoid causing internal damage to the instrument when observing the sun.
“21. SPECIAL ACCESSORIES”
• Protect the ES from heavy shocks or vibration.
• Never carry the ES on the tripod to another site.
• Turn the power off before removing the battery.
• When placing the ES in its case, first remove its battery and place it in the case in accordance with the layout
plan.
• Consult your local dealer before using the instrument under special conditions such as long periods of
continuous use or high levels of humidity. In general, special conditions are treated as being outside the
scope of the product warranty.
Maintenance
• Always clean the instrument before returning it to the case. The lens requires special care. First, dust it off
with the lens brush to remove tiny particles. Then, after providing a little condensation by breathing on the
lens, wipe it with the wiping cloth.
• If the display unit is dirty, carefully wipe it with a soft, dry cloth. To clean other parts of the instrument or the
carrying case, lightly moisten a soft cloth in a mild detergent solution. Wring out excess water until the cloth
is slightly damp, then carefully wipe the surface of the unit. Do not use any alkaline cleaning solutions,
alcohol, or any other organic solvents, on the instrument or display unit.
• Store the ES in a dry room where the temperature remains fairly constant.
• Check the tripod for loose fit and loose screws.
• If any trouble is found on the rotatable portion, screws or optical parts (e.g. lens), contact your local dealer.
• When the instrument is not used for a long time, check it at least once every 3 months.
“18. CHECKS AND ADJUSTMENTS”
• When removing the ES from the carrying case, never pull it out by force. The empty carrying case should be
closed to protect it from moisture.
• Check the ES for proper adjustment periodically to maintain the instrument accuracy.
vi
Bluetooth Wireless Technology
• Bluetooth function may not be built in depending on telecommunications regulations of the country or the
area where the instrument is purchased. Contact your local dealer for the details.
• Use of this technology must be authorized according to telecommunications regulations of the country where
the instrument is being used. Contact your local dealer in advance.“25. REGULATIONS”
• TOPCON CORPORATION is not liable for the content of any transmission nor any content related thereto.
When communicating important data, run tests beforehand to ascertain that communication is operating
normally.
• Do not divulge the content of any transmission to any third party.
Radio interference when using Bluetooth technology
Bluetooth communication with the ES uses the 2.4 GHz frequency band. This is the same band used by the
devices described below.
• Industrial, scientific, and medical (ISM) equipment such as microwaves and pacemakers.
• portable premises radio equipment (license required) used in factory production lines etc.
• portable specified low-power radio equipment (license-exempt)
• IEEE802.11b/IEEE802.11g standard wireless LAN devices
The above devices use the same frequency band as Bluetooth communications. As a result, using the ES within
proximity to the above devices may result in interference causing communication failure or reduction of
transmission speed.
Although a radio station license is not required for this instrument, bear in mind the following points when using
Bluetooth technology for communication.

Regarding portable premises radio equipment and portable specified low-power radio equipment:
• Before starting transmission, check that operation will not take place within the vicinity of portable
premises radio equipment or specified low-power radio equipment.
• In the case that the instrument causes radio interference with portable premises radio equipment,
terminate the connection immediately and take measures to prevent further interference (e.g. connect
using an interface cable).
• In the case that the instrument causes radio interference with portable specified low-power radio
equipment, contact your local dealer.

When using the ES in proximity to IEEE802.11b or IEEE802.11g standard wireless LAN devices, turn off all
devices not being used.
• Interference may result, causing transmission speed to slow or even disrupting the connection
completely.

Do not use the ES in proximity to microwaves.
• Microwave ovens can cause significant interference resulting in communication failure. Perform
communication at a distance of 3m or more from microwave ovens.

Refrain from using the ES in proximity to televisions and radios.
• Televisions and radios use a different frequency band to Bluetooth communications.
However, even if the ES is used within proximity to the above equipment with no adverse effects with
regard to Bluetooth communication, moving a Bluetooth compatible device (including the ES) closer to
said equipment may result in electronic noise in sound or images, adversely affecting the performance of
televisions and radios.
Precautions regarding transmission

For best results
• The usable range becomes shorter when obstacles block the line of sight, or devices such as PDAs or
computers are used. Wood, glass and plastic will not impede communication but the usable range
becomes shorter. Moreover, wood, glass and plastic containing metal frames, plates, foil and other heat
shielding elements as well as coatings containing metallic powders may adversely affect Bluetooth
communication and concrete, reinforced concrete, and metal will render it impossible.
vii
• Use a vinyl or plastic cover to protect the instrument from rain and moisture. Metallic materials should not
be used.

Reduced range due to atmospheric conditions
• The radio waves used by the ES may be absorbed or scattered by rain, fog, and moisture from the
human body with the limit of usable range becoming lower as a result. Similarly, usable range may also
shorten when performing communication in wooded areas. Moreover, as wireless devices lose signal
strength when close to the ground, perform communication at as high a position as possible.

• TOPCON CORPORATION cannot guarantee full compatibility with all Bluetooth products on the market.
Exporting this product (Relating EAR)
This product is equipped with the parts/units, and contains software/technology, which are subject to the EAR
(Export Administration Regulations). Depending on countries you wish to export or bring the product to, a US
export license may be required. In such a case, it is your responsibility to obtain the license. The countries
requiring the license as of May 2013 are shown below. Please consult the Export Administration Regulations as
they are subject to change.
North Korea
Iran
Syria
Sudan
Cuba
URL for the EAR of the US: http://www.bis.doc.gov/policiesandregulations/ear/index.htm
Exporting this product (Relating telecommunications regulations)
Wireless communication module is incorporated in the instrument. Use of this technology must be compliant
with telecommunications regulations of the country where the instrument is being used.
Even exporting the wireless communication module may require conformity with the regulations.
Contact your local dealer in advance.
Exceptions from Responsibility
• The user of this product is expected to follow all operating instructions and make periodic checks (hardware
only) of the product’s performance.
• The manufacturer, or its representatives, assumes no responsibility for results of faulty or intentional usage
or misuse including any direct, indirect, consequential damage, or loss of profits.
• The manufacturer, or its representatives, assumes no responsibility for consequential damage, or loss of
profits due to any natural disaster, (earthquake, storms, floods etc.), fire, accident, or an act of a third party
and/or usage under unusual conditions.
• The manufacturer, or its representatives, assumes no responsibility for any damage (change of data, loss of
data, loss of profits, an interruption of business etc.) caused by use of the product or an unusable product.
• The manufacturer, or its representatives, assumes no responsibility for any damage, and loss of profits
caused by usage different to that explained in the instruction manual.
• The manufacturer, or its representatives, assumes no responsibility for damage caused by incorrect
operation, or action resulting from connecting to other products.
viii
LASER SAFETY INFORMATION
ES is classified as the following class of Laser Product according to IEC Standard Publication 60825-1 Ed.3.0:
2014 and United States Government Code of Federal Regulation FDA CDRH 21CFR Part 1040.10 and 1040.11
(Complies with FDA performance standards for laser products except for deviations pursuant to Laser Notice
No.50, dated June 24, 2007.)
Device
Laser class
EDM device
in objective lens
Light beam used for measurement
(When reflectorless measurement is selected in Config mode)
Class 3R
Light beam used for measurement
(When prism or reflective sheet is selected as target in Config
mode)
Class 1
Laser-pointer
Class 3R
Laser plummet (option)
Class 2

• EDM device is classified as Class 3R Laser Product when reflectorless measurement is selected. When the
prism or reflective sheet is selected in Config mode as target, the output is equivalent to the safer class 1.
Warning
• Use of controls or adjustments or performance of procedures other than those specified herein may result in
hazardous radiation exposure.
• Follow the safety instructions on the labels attached to the instrument as well as in this manual to ensure
safe use of this laser product.
࣮ࣞࢨගࡢฟཱྀ
AVOID EXPOSURE-Laser radiation
is emitted from this aperture.
Laser beam
emitted
from here
࣮ࣞࢨග
┠࡬ࡢ┤᥋⿕ࡤࡃࢆ㑊ࡅࡿࡇ࡜
0$;P:/'QP
ࢡࣛࢫ5࣮ࣞࢨ〇ရ
-,6&
LASER RADIATION
AVOID DIRECT EYE EXPOSURE
MAX 5mW LD 625-695nm
CLASS3R LASER PRODUCT
IEC 60825-1 Ed.3.0: 2014
Laser beam
emitted
from here*
*: only for instruments with laser plummet (option)
• Never intentionally point the laser beam at another person.The laser beam is injurious to the eyes and skin.
If an eye injury is caused by exposure to the laser beam, seek immediate medical attention from a licensed
ophthalmologist.
• Do not look directly into the laser beam. Doing so could cause permanent eye damage.
• Do not stare at the laser beam. Doing so could cause permanent eye damage.
• Never look at the laser beam through a telescope, binoculars or other optical instruments. Doing so could
cause permanent eye damage.
• Sight targets so that laser beam does not stray from them.
ix
Caution
• Perform checks at start of work and periodic checks and adjustments with the laser beam emitted under
normal conditions.
• When the instrument is not being used, turn off the power.
• When disposing of the instrument, destroy the battery connector so that the laser beam cannot be emitted.
• Operate the instrument with due caution to avoid injuries that may be caused by the laser beam
unintentionally striking a person in the eye. Avoid setting the instrument at heights at which the path of the
laser beam may strike pedestrians or drivers at head height.
• Never point the laser beam at mirrors, windows or surfaces that are highly reflective. The reflected laser
beam could cause serious injury.
• After using the Laser-pointer function, be sure to turn OFF the emission of the laser beam.
• Only those who have been received training as per the following items shall use this product.
• Read the Operator’s manual for usage procedures for this product.
• Hazardous protection procedures (read this chapter).
• Requisite protective gear (read this chapter).
• Accident reporting procedures (stipulate procedures beforehand for transporting the injured and
contacting physicians in case there are laser induced injuries).
• Persons working within the range of the laser beam are advised to wear eye protection which corresponds to
the laser wavelength of the instrument being used.
• Areas in which the laser is used should be posted with a standard laser warning sign.
Symbol mark while the laser is emitting
The following symbol mark will appear at the right side
of the second line.
TILT SENSOR:[XY-ON]
X:-0°00'25"
Y: 0°00'20"
X-ON XY-ON OFF ---
x
Symbol mark
Contents
HOW TO READ THIS MANUAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . i
PRECAUTIONS FOR SAFE OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ii
PRECAUTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . v
LASER SAFETY INFORMATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ix
Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xi
1 NOMENCLATURE AND FUNCTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1
1.1
1.2
1.3
1.4
1.5
1.6
1.7
Nomenclature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1
Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2
Operating Key. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3
Function Key (Soft Key) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4
Star key mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6
Serial signal RS-232C connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-8
Bluetooth communication (Only for built-in Bluetooth model). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-8
2 PREPARATION FOR MEASUREMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1
2.1
2.2
2.3
2.4
2.5
Power Switch Key ON . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1
Battery Power Remaining Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2
Vertical and Horizontal Angle Tilt Correction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3
How to Enter Alphanumeric Characters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5
Setting Instrument Up for Measurement. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8
2.5.1 Centering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8
2.5.2 Levelling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9
2.6 FOCUSSING AND TARGET SIGHTING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11
3 ANGLE MEASUREMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1
3.1 Measuring Horizontal Angle Right and Vertical Angle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1
3.2 Switching Horizontal Angle Right/Left. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2
3.3 Measuring from the Required Horizontal Angle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2
3.3.1 Setting by Holding the Angle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2
3.3.2 Setting a Horizontal Angle from the Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3
3.4 Vertical Angle Percent Grade(%) Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3
3.5 Repetition Angle Measurement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4
3.6 Buzzer Sounding for Horizontal Angle 90° Increments. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5
3.7 Compasses (vertical angle) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6
4 DISTANCE MEASUREMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1
4.1
4.2
4.3
4.4
4.5
4.6
4.7
Setting of the Atmospheric Correction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2
Setting of the Correction for Prism Constant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2
Distance Measurement (Continuous Measurement) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2
Distance Measurement (N-time Measurement/Single Measurement) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3
Fine Mode/Tracking Mode/Coarse Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4
Stake Out (S.O) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5
Offset Measurement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-6
4.7.1 Angle Offset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-7
4.7.2 Distance Offset Measurement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-9
4.7.3 Plane Offset Measurement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-11
4.7.4 Column Offset Measurement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-13
5 COORDINATE MEASUREMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1
5.1
5.2
5.3
5.4
Setting Coordinate Values of Occupied Point. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1
Setting Height of the Instrument . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2
Setting Height of Target (Prism Height) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2
Execution of Coordinate Measuring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3
6 SPECIAL MODE (Menu Mode). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1
6.1 Application Measurement (PROGRAMS). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2
6.1.1 Remote Elevation measurement (REM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2
6.1.2 Missing Line Measurement (MLM). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5
6.1.3 Setting Z Coordinate of Occupied Point. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-8
6.1.4 Area Calculation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-11
xi
6.1.5 Point to Line Measurement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-14
6.2 Setting the GRID FACTOR. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-16
6.3 Setting Illumination of Display and Cross Hairs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-17
6.4 Setting Mode 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-18
6.4.1 Setting Minimum Reading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-18
6.4.2 Auto Power Off. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-19
6.4.3 Vertical and Horizontal Angle Tilt correction (Tilt ON/OFF) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-20
6.4.4 Systematic Error of Instrument Correction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-20
6.4.5 Setting RS-232C communication with external device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-22
6.4.6 Selecting Communication Port. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-23
6.4.7 Confirming the Bluetooth Device Address and Setting the PIN code
(Only for built-in Bluetooth model) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-24
6.5 Setting Contrast of Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-25
6.6 ROAD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-26
6.6.1 Input Start Point . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-27
6.6.2 Input Road Data. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-28
6.6.3 Search Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-32
6.6.4 Edit Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-32
6.6.5 Set OCC and BS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-33
6.6.6 Setout Road . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-35
6.6.7 Select a File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-36
6.6.8 Initialize ROAD data. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-36
7 DATA COLLECTION. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1
7.1 Preparation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3
7.1.1 Selecting a File for Data Collection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3
7.1.2 Selecting a Coordinate File for Data Collection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-4
7.1.3 Occupied Point and Backsight Point . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-5
7.2 Operational Procedure of DATA COLLECT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-7
7.2.1 Searching the recorded data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-8
7.2.2 Entering PCODE / ID using PCODE Library . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-8
7.2.3 Entering PCODE / ID from the list of PCODE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-9
7.3 Data Collect Offset Measurement mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-10
7.3.1 Angle Offset Measurement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-10
7.3.2 Distance Offset Measurement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-12
7.3.3 Plane Offset Measurement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-14
7.3.4 Column Offset Measurement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-16
7.4 NEZ Auto Calculation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-17
7.5 Point to Line Measurement. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-18
7.5.1 To change to the point to line measurement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-18
7.5.2 Executing a point to line measurement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-19
7.6 Editing PCODE Library [PCODE INPUT] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-20
7.7 Setting Parameter of Data Collect [CONFIG.] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-21
8 LAYOUT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1
8.1 Preparation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-3
8.1.1 Setting the GRID FACTOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-3
8.1.2 Selecting Coordinate Data File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-4
8.1.3 Setting Occupied Point . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-5
8.1.4 Setting Backsight Point . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-7
8.2 Executing a Layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-9
8.2.1 Layout of Coordinates of Point to Line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-11
8.3 Setting a New Point . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-12
8.3.1 Side Shot Method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-12
8.3.2 Resection Method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-14
9 MEMORY MANAGER MODE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-1
9.1 Display Internal Memory Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2
9.2 Searching Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3
9.2.1 Measured Data Searching . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3
9.2.2 Coordinate Data Searching . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5
9.2.3 PCODE LIBRARY Searching. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-6
9.3 File Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-7
9.3.1 Rename a File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-8
9.3.2 Searching Data in a File. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-8
xii
9.3.3 Deleting a File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-9
9.4 Coordinate Data Direct Key Input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-10
9.4.1 Coordinate data input. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-10
9.4.2 PTL (Point to Line) data input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-11
9.5 Delete a Coordinate Data from a File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-12
9.6 Editing PCODE Library . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-13
9.7 Data Communications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-14
9.7.1 Sending Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-14
9.7.2 Loading Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-16
9.7.3 Setting Parameter of Data Communications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-17
9.7.4 Confirming the parameters for Bluetooth communication
(Only for built-in Bluetooth model) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-18
9.8 Initialization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-19
10 SET AUDIO MODE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-1
11 SETTING THE PRISM CONSTANT VALUE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-1
12 SETTING ATMOSPHERIC CORRECTION. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-1
12.1 Calculation of Atmospheric Correction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-1
12.2 Setting of Atmospheric Correction Value . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-2
13 CORRECTION FOR REFRACTION AND EARTH CURVATURE . . . 13-1
13.1 Distance Calculation Formula. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-1
14 POWER SOURCE AND CHARGING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-1
14.1 Battery Charging. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-1
14.2 Installing/Removing the Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-2
15 USING USB FLASH DRIVE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-1
15.1 Inserting the USB flash drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-1
16 DETACH/ATTACH OF TRIBRACH. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-1
17 SELECTING MODE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-1
17.1 Items of the Selecting Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-1
17.2 How to Set Selecting Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-3
18 CHECKS AND ADJUSTMENTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-1
18.1
18.2
18.3
18.4
18.5
18.6
18.7
Circular Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-1
Adjustment of Vertical Angle 0 Datum . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-2
Adjustment of Compensation Systematic Error of Instrument . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-3
Reticle. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-5
Optical Plummet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-6
Additive Distance Constant. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-7
Checking and Adjusting of Laser Plummet. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-8
19 TOP FIELD MODE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19-1
19.1 MAIN MENU (Major Functions) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19-1
19.2 JOB. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19-1
19.2.1 To Create New Job . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19-1
19.2.2 To Select Existing Job . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19-2
19.2.3 To Delete Job. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19-2
19.2.4 When Job is not to be Used . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19-3
19.3 SETTING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19-3
19.4 GO TO WORK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19-4
19.4.1 To Set Occupied Point and Backsight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19-4
19.4.2 To Layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19-13
19.4.3 To Conduct Ordinary Measurement and to Record Coordinates. . . . . . . . . . 19-14
19.5 DATA MANAGER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19-16
19.5.1 To Add Coordinate Data To Add Coordinate Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19-16
19.5.2 To Delete Coordinate Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19-20
19.5.3 To View Coordinate Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19-21
19.5.4 To Edit Coordinate Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19-22
19.5.5 To Transfer Coordinate Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19-23
20 PRECAUTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-1
xiii
21 SPECIAL ACCESSORIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21-1
22 BATTERY SYSTEM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22-1
23 PRISM SYSTEM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23-1
24 ERROR DISPLAYS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24-1
25 REGULATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25-1
26 SPECIFICATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26-1
APPENDIX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .APPENDIX-1
Target for Laser plummet adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . APPENDIX-1
xiv
1 NOMENCLATURE AND FUNCTIONS
1
NOMENCLATURE AND FUNCTIONS
1.1 Nomenclature
17
1
16
2
4
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
3
15
14
4
5
13
6
7
8
12
11
9
10
29
18
28
19
27
4
26
20
21
4
22
23
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
Handle
Bluetooth antenna
External interface hatch
(USB port)
Instrument height mark
Battery cover
Operation panel
Serial connector
Circular level
Circular level adjusting screws
Base plate
Levelling foot screw
Optical plummet focussing ring
Optical plummet eyepiece
Optical plummet reticle cover
(12-14: Not included on
instruments with laser plummet
(option))
Display unit
Objective lens
(Includes Laser-pointer function)
Handle locking screw
Tubular compass slot
Vertical clamp
Vertical fine motion screw
Speaker
Trigger key
Horizontal fine motion screw
Horizontal clamp
Tribrach clamp
Telescope eyepiece screw
Telescope focussing ring
Sighting collimator
Instrument center mark
24
25
 Sighting collimator
Use sighting collimator to aim the ES in the direction of the measurement point. Turn the instrument
until the triangle in the sighting collimator is aligned with the target.
 Instrument height mark
The height of the ES is as follows:
• 192.5mm (from tribrach mounting surface to this mark)
• 236mm (from tribrach dish (TR-103) to this mark)
"Instrument height" is input when setting instrument station data and is the height from the
measuring point (where ES is mounted) to this mark.
 Trigger Key
Press the trigger key when the ES is in the observation screen or when [MEAS] is indicated on the
display unit. You can start/stop measurement.
In the screen displaying [AUTO], press trigger key to perform automatic operation from distance
measurement to recording.
1-1
1 NOMENCLATURE AND FUNCTIONS
 Laser-pointer Function
A target can be sighted with a red laser beam in dark locations without the use of the telescope.
 Handle
The handle can be removed from the instrument. To remove it, loosen the handle locking screw.
Handle
Handle
locking screw
1.2 Display
 Display
The display uses a graphic LCD which has 4 lines and 20 characters per line. In general, the upper
three lines display measured data, and the bottom line displays the soft key function which changes
with the measuring mode.
 Contrast and Illumination
The contrast and illumination of display window are adjusted. See Chapter 6 “SPECIAL MODE
(Menu Mode)” or section 1.5 “Star key mode”.
 Example
V :
HR:
90°10'20"
120°30'40"
HR: 120°30'40"
HD*
65.432 m
VD:
12.345 m
MEAS MODE NP/P P1↓
0SET HOLD HSET P1↓
Angle measurement mode
Distance measurement mode
V-angle
H-angle
Horizontal-angle
: 120°30’40”
Horizontal distance : 65.432m
Relative elevation : 12.345m
: 90°10’20”
: 120°30’40”
Feet unit
Feet and inch unit
HR: 120°30'40"
HD* 123.45 f
VD:
12.34 f
MEAS MODE NP/P P1↓
HR: 120°30'40"
HD* 123.04.6f
VD:
12.03.4f
MEAS MODE NP/P P1↓
Horizontal-angle
: 120°30’40”
Horizontal distance : 123.45ft
Relative elevation : 12.34ft
Horizontal-angle
: 120°30’40”
Horizontal distance : 123ft4in6/8in
Relative elevation : 12ft3in4/8in
1-2
1 NOMENCLATURE AND FUNCTIONS
 Display marks
Display
Contents
Display
Contents
V
V-angle
HR
H-angle right
∗
EDM working
m
Meter unit
HL
H-angle left
f
Feet unit / Feet and inch unit
N
HD
Horizontal distance
VD
Relative elevation
Sheet mode
SD
Slope distance
Laser emitting mark
N
N coordinate
E
E coordinate
Z
Z coordinate
Bluetooth is under communication.
(This symbol mark of the Bluetooth will
be displayed above the battery mark
when the pulse total station is in the
state which can be communicated by
Bluetooth.)
non-prism mode
P
1.3 Operating Key
Illumination key
Star key
Power key
MENU
Display unit
ANG
Alphanumeric
characters key
Softkey selection
Keys
{}
Name of Key
Star key
{
}
Coordinate
meas.key
{
}
Distance meas.key
{ANG}
Angle meas.key
Function
Switches to Star key mode
This mode is used for each presetting or displaying as follows.
1 Contrast of the display, 2 Reticle illumination, 3 Laser pointer, 4 Tilt
correction, 5 Set audio mode, 6 Laser Plummet
• Press {} during Star key mode to go to the Tilt Screen.
For levelling procedure: see Section 2.5.2 “Levelling”.
Switches to coordinate measurement mode
Switches to distance measurement mode
Switches to angle measurement mode
1-3
1 NOMENCLATURE AND FUNCTIONS
Keys
Name of Key
{MENU}
Menu key
Function
Switches to menu mode
Starts measurement applications and performs various settings
Illumination key
Lights up the display unit and key
Switches the screen/key backlight and Reticle illumination ON/OFF
{SHIFT
}
Shift / Target key
Switches between target types (prism mode/sheet mode/non-prism mode)
{FUNC}
Function key
{0} – {9} /
{.} / {±}
Alphanumeric
characters key
{
}
{ESC}
Not in use
Input letters/figures
For entering alphanumeric characters, see Section 2.4 “How to
Enter Alphanumeric Characters”.
 Returns to the measurement mode or previous layer mode from the
mode set
 Switches to data collection mode or layout mode directly from the
normal measurement mode
 It is also possible to use as Record key in normal measurement mode.
Escape key
For selecting function of Escape key, see Chapter 17 “SELECTING MODE” .
{ENT}
Enter key
Selects/accepts input word/value
{
Power key
Turns ON/OFF of power source (Power OFF: Press and hold: About 1
second)
}
Soft key
(Function key)
{F1} – {F4}
Respond to the message displayed.
1.4 Function Key (Soft Key)
The Soft Key message is displayed at the bottom line of display. The functions are according to the
displayed message.
Angle measurement mode
V:
HR:
Distance measurement mode
90°10'20"
120°30'40"
0SET HOLD HSET
HR: 120°30'40"
HD*[r]
<< m
VD:
m
MEAS MODE NP/P P1↓
P1↓
TILT REP
V% P2↓
H-BZ R/L CMPS P3↓
OFSET S.O
P2↓
S/A
--- m/f/i
---
P3↓
Coordinates measurement mode
{F1}
{F2}
{F3}
{F4}
N: 123.456
E: 34.567
Z: 78.912
MEAS MODE NP/P
Soft keys
m
m
m
P1↓
R.HT INSHT OCC P2↓
OFSET m/f/i S/A P3↓
1-4
1 NOMENCLATURE AND FUNCTIONS
Angle measurement
Page
1
2
3
Soft
key
Display
mark
Function
{F1}
0SET
Angle of Horizontal is set to 0°00'00"
{F2}
HOLD
Hold the horizontal angle.
{F3}
HSET
Sets a required horizontal angle by entering numerals.
{F4}
P1↓
The function of soft keys is shown on next page (P2).
{F1}
TILT
Setting Tilt Correction
If ON, the display shows tilt correction value.
{F2}
REP
Repetition angle measurement mode
{F3}
V%
Vertical angle percent grade(%) mode
{F4}
P2↓
The function of soft keys is shown on next page (P3).
{F1}
H-BZ
{F2}
R/L
{F3}
CMPS
{F4}
P3↓
Sets the buzzer sound for every horizontal angle 90°.
Switches R/L rotation of horizontal angle.
Switches the COMPASS ON/OFF of vertical angle.
The function of soft keys is shown on next page (P1).
Distance measurement mode
1
{F1}
MEAS
{F2}
MODE
{F3}
NP/P
Switches non-prism mode, prism mode or sheet mode.
P1↓
The function of soft keys is shown on next page (P2).
{F4}
{F1}
2
3
{F2}
Start measuring
Sets a measuring mode, Fine/Coarse/Tracking.
OFSET Select Off-set measurement mode.
S.O
Select stake out measurement mode.
{F3}
S/A
Select set audio mode.
{F4}
P2↓
The function of soft keys is shown on next page (P3).
{F2}
m/f/i
Switches meter, feet or feet and inch unit.
{F4}
P3↓
The function of soft keys is shown on next page (P1).
Coordinate measurement mode
1
2
{F1}
MEAS
Start measuring.
{F2}
MODE
Sets a measuring mode, Fine/Coarse/Tracking.
{F3}
NP/P
Switches non-prism mode, prism mode or sheet mode.
{F4}
P1↓
The function of soft keys is shown on next page (P2).
{F1}
R.HT
Sets a prism height by input values.
{F2}
INSHT
{F3}
OCC
Sets an instrument coordinate point by input values.
{F4}
P2↓
The function of soft keys is shown on next page (P3).
{F1}
3
{F2}
Sets an instrument height by input values.
OFSET Select Off-set measurement mode.
m/f/i
Switches meter, feet or feet and inch unit.
{F3}
S/A
Select set audio mode.
{F4}
P3↓
The function of soft keys is shown on next page (P1).
1-5
1 NOMENCLATURE AND FUNCTIONS
1.5 Star key mode
Press the {} key to view the instrument options.
The following instrument options can be selected from the {}:
1. Adjustment the contrast of the display (0 to 15 steps) { } or { }
2. Adjustment the reticle illumination (1 to 5 steps) { } or { }
3. Turn the Laser pointer option ON/OFF
4. Setting Tilt Correction
5. S/A (set audio) mode
6. Adjustment the contrast of the laser plummet (1 to 5 steps) { } or {
7. Turn the Laser plummet option ON/OFF
}

•
Star key mode does not function when the same function as the function assigned to the star key
mode is performed from the main routine.
•
Press {} during Star key mode to go to the Tilt Screen.
For levelling procedure: see Section 2.5.2 “Levelling”.
V:
HR:
77°42'30"
120°30'40"
P1↓
0SET HOLD HSET
Press the {} key.
Press the {ESC} key.
V:
HR:
77°42'30"
120°30'40"
0SET HOLD HSET
P1↓
Press the {ESC} key.
Press the {} key.
X
X -3'20"
Y 3'40"
Y
EXIT
key
Function
{F1}
Turn the Laser plummet option ON/OFF
{F2}
Setting Tilt Correction
If ON, the display shows tilt correction value.
{F3}
Turn the Laser pointer option ON / OFF [
{F4}
The light acceptance quantity level for the EDM (SIGNAL), the
atmospheric correction value (PPM) and correction value of prism
constant (PSM / NPM / SHT) are displayed.*1)
{
{
{
Display mark
or
}
{
or
]
Adjust the contrast of the display (0 to 15 steps)
}
} or {
{
/
}
}
}
Adjust the Reticle Illumination (1 to 5 steps)
ON/OFF of the reticle illumination is linked with ON/OFF of the backlight.
Adjust the laser plummet brightness (1 to 5 steps)
(displayed only when the laser plummet is ON)
1-6
1 NOMENCLATURE AND FUNCTIONS
 Adjustment the contrast (0 to 15) of the display
This enable you to adjust the contrast of the display.
Press the up or down arrow keys to adjust the contrast.
 Adjustment the reticle illumination (1 to 5)
This enable you to adjust the reticle illumination.
Press the right or left arrow keys to adjust the reticle illumination.
The switch of reticle illumination will be interlocked with the switch of display backlight.
 Lighting and Extinguishing of Laser Pointer
Whenever the {F3} key is pressed, the laser pointer will light up or be extinguished, in that order.
The laser pointer assists with collimation by radiating visible laser light from the objective lens to the
target.
Laser aperture

•
•
•
•
The laser pointer indicates the approximate collimation position of the telescope. It does not
indicate the exact collimation position.
You cannot see the laser pointer when looking through the telescope. Therefore, please look
directly, with the naked eye, at the point indicated by the laser pointer.
The distance to which the laser pointer can be used will vary with climatic conditions and with
the eyesight of the user.
When the laser pointer is used, the operating time of internal power source will become short.
 Tilt correction
The tilt setting mode performed here will not be memorized after powering OFF. To set TILT
correction in the initialized setting (it is memorized after powering OFF), see Section 6.4.3 “Vertical
and Horizontal Angle Tilt correction (Tilt ON/OFF)”.
 Set audio mode
The light acceptance quantity level (Signal level) is displayed in this mode.
When reflected light from the prism is received, a buzzer sounds. This function is good for easy
collimation when the target is difficult to find.
Press the {F4} key to view the set audio screen.
To stop the buzzer, refer to Chapter 17 “SELECTING MODE”.
Also, it is possible to display the signal level in Distance Measuring Mode.
The temperature, pressure, PPM, PSM and NPM can be viewed in set audio mode.
Refer to Chapter 10 “SET AUDIO MODE”, Chapter 11 “SETTING THE PRISM CONSTANT
VALUE” and Chapter 12 “SETTING ATMOSPHERIC CORRECTION”, for further instructions.
1-7
1 NOMENCLATURE AND FUNCTIONS
1.6 Serial signal RS-232C connector
The serial signal connector is used for connecting the ES with a computer or TOPCON Data Collector,
which enables the computer to receive measured data from the ES or to send preset data of horizontal
angle, etc. to it.
The following data will be output at each mode.
Mode
Output
Angle mode (V, HR or HL) (V in percent)
V, HR (or HL)
Horizontal distance mode (HR, HD, VD)
V, HR, HD, VD
Slope distance mode (V, HR, SD)
V, HR, SD, HD
Coordinate mode
N, E, Z, HR (or V, HR, SD, N, E, Z)

•
•
The display and the output at the coarse mode are the same as the contents above.
Output at the tracking mode is displayed as distance data only.
The details necessary for the connection with the ES are obtained from the ES-60 series Interface
Manual which is optionally available. Please refer to the manual.
1.7 Bluetooth communication (Only for built-in Bluetooth model)
By built-in Bluetooth, it can communicate with Bluetooth instruments by wireless, without connecting a
serial signal connector.
1-8
2 PREPARATION FOR MEASUREMENT
2
PREPARATION FOR MEASUREMENT
2.1 Power Switch Key ON
1 Confirm the instrument is leveled.
2 Press the power key.
Press the power key
X
X -3'20"
Y 3'40"
Y
EXIT
Press the {F1} (EXIT) key
V :
HR:
0SET
90°10'20"
0°00'00"
HOLD
HSET
P1↓
Bluetooth is under communication.
(This symbol mark of the Bluetooth will
be displayed when the total station is in
the sate which can be communicated by
Bluetooth.)
Battery Power Remaining Display

•
Confirm the battery power remaining display. Replace with charged battery or charge when battery
level is low or indicates “Battery empty”. See Section 2.2 “Battery Power Remaining Display”.
 Contrast adjustment
You can confirm prism constant value (PSM), non-prism constant value (NPM), sheet constant
value (SHT), atmospheric correction value (PPM) and you can also adjust the contrast of the
display when the instrument is turned on.
To display this screen, see Chapter 17 “SELECTING MODE”.
CONTRAST ADJUSTMENT
PSM: 0.0 PPM
0.0
NPM: 0.0 SHT: 0.0
↓
↑
- - ENTER
This enables you to adjust the brightness by pressing the {F1} (↓) or {F2} (↑) key.
To memorize the setting value after powering off, press {F4} (ENTER) key.
2-1
2 PREPARATION FOR MEASUREMENT
2.2 Battery Power Remaining Display
Battery power remaining display indicates the power condition.
V :
HR:
0SET
90°10'20"
0°00'00"
HOLD
Measurement is possible.
HSET
P1↓
The power is poor. The battery
should be recharged or replaced.
Battery power remaining display
Blinking
<Battery empty>
Other displays disappear.
Measurement is impossible.
Need to recharge or replace
the battery.

•
The battery operating time will vary depending on the environmental conditions such as ambient
temperature, charging time, the number of times of charging and discharging etc. It is
recommended for safety to charge the battery beforehand or to prepare spare full charged
batteries.
•
For general usage of the battery, see Chapter 14 "POWER SOURCE AND CHARGING".
•
The battery power remaining display shows the power level regarding to the measurement mode
now operating.
The safety condition indicated by the battery power remaining display in the angle measurement
mode does not necessarily assure the battery's ability to be used in the distance measurement
mode.
It may happen that the mode change from the angle mode to the distance mode will stop the
operation because of insufficient battery power for the distance mode which consumes more power
than angle mode.
2-2
2 PREPARATION FOR MEASUREMENT
2.3 Vertical and Horizontal Angle Tilt Correction
When the tilt sensors are activated, automatic correction of vertical and horizontal angle for
mislevelment is displayed.
To ensure a precise angle measurement, tilt sensors must be turned on. The display can also be used
to fine level the instrument. If the (TILT OVER) display appears the instrument is out of automatic
compensation range and must be leveled manually.
Zenith
Zenith
Standing axis
Standing axis
Inclination of the standing
axis in the Y direction
Inclination of the standing
axis in the X direction
Trunnion axis
Horizontal

•
ES compensates both the vertical angle and the horizontal angle readings due to inclination of the
standing axis in the X and Y directions.
When the instrument is out of compensation. (TILT OVER)
V :
HR:
°
°
'
'
"
"
<X TILT OVER>
Standing Axis in the X direction
out of range
V :
HR:
°
°
'
'
"
"
<Y TILT OVER>
Standing Axis in the Y direction
out of range
V :
HR:
°
°
'
'
"
"
<XY TILT OVER>
Standing Axis in the X and Y
directions out of range
•
The display of Vertical or Horizontal angle is unstable when instrument is on an unstable stage or a
windy day. You can turn off the auto tilt correction function of V/H angle in this case.
•
To set auto tilt correction from the moment that power is on, See Section 6.4.3 “Vertical and
Horizontal Angle Tilt correction (Tilt ON/OFF)”.
2-3
2 PREPARATION FOR MEASUREMENT
 Setting Tilt Correction by Soft Key
To enable you to select tilt ON/OFF function. setting is not memorized after power is OFF.
[Example] Setting X,Y Tilt OFF
Operating procedure
Option
1 Press {F4} key to get the function page 2.
{F4}
Display
V :
HR:
90°10'20"
120°30'40"
0SET
HOLD HSET
TILT
2 Press {F1} (TILT) key.
In case ON is already selected, the display shows
tilt correction value.
3 Press {F3} (OFF) key.
REP
V%
P1↓
P2↓
{F1}
TILT SENSOR:[XY-ON]
X:-0°00'25"
Y: 0°00'20"
X-ON XY-ON OFF ---
{F3}
TILT SENSOR:
[OFF]
X-ON XY-ON OFF --4 Press {ESC} key.
{ESC}
V :
HR:
90°10'20"
120°30'40"
0SET
HOLD HSET
P1↓
 The setting mode performed here will not be memorized after powering OFF. To set TILT correction in
the initialized setting (it is memorized after powering OFF), See Section 6.4.3 “Vertical and Horizontal
Angle Tilt correction (Tilt ON/OFF)”.
2-4
2 PREPARATION FOR MEASUREMENT
2.4 How to Enter Alphanumeric Characters
This enables you to enter alphanumeric characters such as the instrument height, prism height,
occupied point, backsight point etc.
MENU
ANG
Alphanumeric characters key
Keys
Name of Key
Function
{0} – {9}
Number key
During numeric input, input number of the key.
During alphabetic input, input the characters displayed above the key in the
order they are listed.
{.} / {±}
Input a decimal point/plus or minus sign during numeric input.
Decimal point key/
Plus-minus sign key During alphabetic input, input the characters displayed above the key in the
order they are listed.
{} / {}
Cursor key
Right and left cursor/Select other option.
{} / {}
Cursor key
Up and down cursor.
{ESC}
Escape key
Cancel the input data.
{B.S.}
Backspace key
{ENT}
Enter key
Delete a character on the left.
Select/accept input word/value.
2-5
2 PREPARATION FOR MEASUREMENT
 How to select a item
[Example setting] Occupied point in the data collection mode.
PT#
→ST-01
ID
:
INS.HT:
0.000 m
INPUT SRCH REC OCNEZ
The arrow indicates a item to enter.
The arrow line moves up or down when the
{ } key or { } key is pressed.
{
}
or
{
}
PT#
:ST-01
ID
→
INS.HT: 0.000 m
INPUT SRCH REC OCNEZ
PT#
:ST-01
ID
:
INS.HT→ 0.000 m
INPUT SRCH REC OCNEZ
 How to enter characters
[Example setting] TOPCON-1
1 Move the arrow to enter a item using the {
or {
}
PT#
→
ID
:
INS.HT: 0.000 m
INPUT SRCH REC OCNEZ
} key.
2 Press the {F1} (INPUT) key.
The arrow changes to the equal (=).
The instrument switches to numerical input mode.
3 Press the {F1} ([ALP]) key.
The instrument switches to alphabetical input mode.
4 Enter letters of the alphabet by pressing the alphanumeric
characters key.
Example: {1} (STU) key is pressed twice.
5 Enter other letters of the alphabet in the same way.
2-6
PT#
=
ID
:
INS.HT: 0.000 m
[ALP][SPC][CLR][ENT]
PT#
=
ID
:
INS.HT: 0.000 m
[NUM][SPC][CLR][ENT]
PT#
=T
ID
:
INS.HT: 0.000 m
[NUM][SPC][CLR][ENT]
PT#
=TOPCON
ID
:
INS.HT: 0.000 m
[NUM][SPC][CLR][ENT]
2 PREPARATION FOR MEASUREMENT
6 Press the {F1} (NUM) key, again.
The instrument switches back to numerical input mode.
7 Enter numbers by pressing the alphanumeric characters key.
Example: { - }, {1} key is pressed.
PT#
=TOPCON
ID
:
INS.HT: 0.000 m
[ALP][SPC][CLR][ENT]
PT#
=TOPCON-1
ID
:
INS.HT: 0.000 m
[ALP][SPC][CLR][ENT]
8 Press {F4} (ENT) key.
The arrow moves to next item.
Select next character in the same manner.

•
To correct a character, move the cursor to correct character by pressing {
2-7
} or {
} key and enter again.
2 PREPARATION FOR MEASUREMENT
2.5 Setting Instrument Up for Measurement
Mount the instrument to the tripod. Level and center the instrument precisely to insure the best
performance. Use tripods with a tripod screw of 5/8 in. diameter and 11 threads per inch, such as the
Type E TOPCON wide- frame wooden tripod.

•
Mount the battery in the instrument before performing this operation because the instrument will tilt
slightly if the battery is mounted after levelling.
2.5.1 Centering
 PROCEDURE: Centering with the optical plummet eyepiece
1
Make sure the legs are spaced at equal intervals and
the head is approximately level.
Set the tripod so that the head is positioned over the
survey point.
Make sure the tripod shoes are firmly fixed in the
ground.
2
Place the instrument on the tripod head.
Supporting it with one hand, tighten the centering screw
on the bottom of the unit to make sure it is secured to
the tripod.
Centering
screw
3
4
5
Looking through the optical plummet eyepiece, turn the
optical plummet eyepiece to focus on the reticle.
Turn the optical plummet focussing ring to focus on the
survey point.
Adjust the levelling foot screws to center the survey
point in the optical plummet reticle.
Continue to the levelling procedure.
See Section 2.5.2 “Levelling”.
2-8
Focussing on the survey point
Focussing
on the
reticle
2 PREPARATION FOR MEASUREMENT
 PROCEDURE: Centering with the laser plummet (Option)
1
2
Set up the tripod and affix the instrument on the tripod
head.
“PROCEDURE: Centering with the optical plummet
eyepiece” steps 1 and 2
Press {ON} to power on
See Section 2.1 “Power Switch Key ON”.
•
The circular level is displayed on the screen.
3
Press {F1} to display observation screen.
4
Press {} to display star key menu, and then press
{F1}.
The laser plummet beam will be emitted from the bottom
of the instrument.
X
X -3'20"
Y 3'40"
Y
EXIT
5
90°10'20"
120°30'40"
0SET
HOLD HSET
V :
HR:
90°10'20"
120°30'40"
0SET
HOLD HSET
V :
HR:
90°10'20"
120°30'40"
0SET
HOLD HSET
P1↓
P1↓
Use {} / {} to adjust the brightness of the laser.
6
Adjust the levelling foot screws to align the laser beam
with the center the survey point.
7
Press {F1} to turn the laser plummet off.
8
V :
HR:
P1↓
Continue to the levelling procedure.
See Section 2.5.2 “Levelling”.

•
Visibility of the laser spot may be affected when operating in direct sunlight. In this event, provide
shade for the survey point.
2-9
2 PREPARATION FOR MEASUREMENT
2.5.2 Levelling
 PROCEDURE
1
2
Perform the centering procedure.
See Section 2.5.1 “Centering”.
Center the bubble in the circular level by either
shortening the tripod leg closest to the offcenter
direction of the bubble or by lengthening the tripod leg
farthest from the offcenter direction of the bubble. Adjust
one more tripod leg to center the bubble.
Tripod legs
adjustment
Turn the levelling foot screws while checking the circular
level until the bubble is centered in the center circle.
3
Press {ON} to power on.
See Section 2.1 “Power Switch Key ON”.
•
The circular level is displayed on the screen.
•
“” indicates bubble in circular level. The range of the
inside circle is ±4' and the range of the outside circle is
±6'.
Tilt angle values X and Y are also displayed on the
screen.
•
“” is not displayed when the tilt of the instrument
exceeds the detection range of the tilt sensor. Level the
instrument while checking the air bubbles in the circular
level until “” is displayed on the screen.
4
•
****
****
Y
EXIT

•
X
X
Y
When executing the measurement program, if
measurement starts with the instrument tilted, the
circular level is displayed on the screen.
Center “” in the circular level
X
 steps 1 to 2
X -3'20"
Y 3'40"
If the bubble is centered, move to step 9.
EXIT
5
Turn the instrument until the telescope is parallel to a
line between levelling foot screws A and B, then tighten
the horizontal clamp.
6
Set the tilt angle to 0° using foot screws A and B for the
X direction and levelling screw C for the Y direction.
2-10
Y
2 PREPARATION FOR MEASUREMENT
7
Loosen the centering screw slightly.
Looking through the optical plummet eyepiece, slide the
instrument over the tripod head until the survey point is
exactly centered in the reticle.
Retighten the centering screw securely.
•
When the instrument was centered using the laser
plummet, emit the plummet beam again to check
position over the survey point.
See “PROCEDURE: Centering with the laser
plummet (Option)”
8
Confirm that the bubble is positioned at the center of the
circular level on the screen.
If not, repeat the procedure starting from step 6.
9
When levelling is completed, press {OK} changes to the
observation screen.
2-11
2 PREPARATION FOR MEASUREMENT
2.6 FOCUSSING AND TARGET SIGHTING

•
When sighting the target, strong light shining directly into the objective lens may cause the
instrument to malfunction. Protect the objective lens from direct light by attaching the lens hood.
Observe to the same point of the reticle when the telescope face is changed.
 PROCEDURE
1
Look through the telescope eyepiece at a bright and
featureless background.
Turn the eyepiece screw clockwise, then counterclockwise
little by little until just before the reticle image becomes
focussed.
Using these procedures, frequent reticle refocussing is not
necessary since your eye is focussed at infinity.
2
Loosen the vertical and horizontal clamps, then use the
sighting collimator to bring the target into the field of view.
Tighten both clamps.
3
Turn the telescope focussing ring to focus on the target.
Turn the vertical and horizontal fine motion screws to align
the target with the reticle.
The last adjustment of each fine motion screw should be in
the clockwise direction.
4
Readjust the focus with the focussing ring until there is no
parallax between the target image and the reticle.
 Eliminating parallax
This is the relative displacement of the target image with respect to the reticle when the observer’s
head is moved slightly before the eyepiece.
Parallax will introduce reading errors and must be removed before observations are taken. Parallax
can be removed by refocussing the reticle.
2-12
3 ANGLE MEASUREMENT
3
ANGLE MEASUREMENT
3.1 Measuring Horizontal Angle Right and Vertical Angle
Make sure the mode is in Angle measurement.
Operating procedure
Operation
1 Collimate the 1st target (A).
Display
Collimate A
V : 90°10'20"
HR: 120°30'40"
0SET HOLD HSET
2 Set horizontal angle of target A at 0° 00' 00".
{F1}
Press the {F1} (0 set) key and press the {F3}
(YES) key.
P1↓
H ANGLE 0 SET
> OK?
--- --- [YES][NO]
{F3}
V :
HR:
90°10'20"
0°00'00"
0SET HOLD HSET
3 Collimate the 2nd target (B).
Collimate B
The required V/H angle to target B will be
displayed.
V :
HR:
P1↓
98°36'20"
160°40'20"
0SET HOLD HSET
P1↓


How to Collimate
1 Point the telescope toward the light. Turn the diopter ring and adjust the diopter so that the cross
hairs are clearly observed.
(Turn the diopter ring toward you first and then backward to focus.)
2 Aim the target at the peak of the triangle mark of the sighting collimator. Allow a certain space
between the sighting collimator and yourself for collimating.
3 Focus the target with the focusing
knob.
* If parallax is created between the
cross hairs and the target when
viewing vertically or horizontally while
looking into the telescope, focusing is
incorrect or diopter adjustment is poor.
This adversely affects precision in
measurement or survey Eliminate the
parallax by carefully focusing
and using diopter adjustment.
Focusing knob
Telescope eyepiece (Diopter ring)
∞
∞
∞
3-1
∞
3 ANGLE MEASUREMENT
3.2 Switching Horizontal Angle Right/Left
Make sure the mode is Angle measurement.
Operating procedure
Operation
1 Press the {F4} (↓) key twice to get the function
{F4}
twice
on page 3.
Display
V : 90°10'20"
HR: 120°30'40"
0SET HOLD HSET
P1↓
TILT REP
P2↓
V%
H-BZ R/L CMPS
2 Press the {F2} (R/L) key.
{F2}
The mode Horizontal angle Right (HR)
switches to (HL) mode.
P3↓
V : 90°10'20"
HL: 239°29'20"
H-BZ R/L CMPS
P3↓
3 Measure as HL mode.
 Every time pressing the {F2} (R/L) key, HR/HL mode switches.
3.3 Measuring from the Required Horizontal Angle
3.3.1 Setting by Holding the Angle
Make sure the mode is angle measurement.
Operating procedure
Operation
1 Set the required horizontal angle, using
Display angle
Horizontal tangent screw
Display
V :
HR:
90°10'20"
130°40'20"
0SET HOLD HSET
2 Press the {F2} (HOLD) key.
{F2}
3 Collimate the target.
P1↓
H ANGLE HOLD
HR: 130°40'20"
>SET ?
--- --- [YES][NO]
Collimate
4 Press the {F3} (YES) key to finish holding the
{F3}
horizontal angle.*1)
The display turns back to normal angle
measurement mode.
V :
HR:
90°10'20"
130°40'20"
0SET HOLD HSET P1↓
*1) To return to the previous mode, press the {F4} (NO) key.
3-2
3 ANGLE MEASUREMENT
3.3.2 Setting a Horizontal Angle from the Keys
Make sure the mode is Angle measurement.
Operating procedure
Operation
1 Collimate the target.
Collimate
Display
V :
HR:
90°10'20"
170°30'20"
0SET HOLD HSET
2 Press the {F3} (HSET) key.
{F3}
P1↓
H ANGLE SET
HR=
--- --- [CLR] [ENT]
3 Input the required horizontal angle by
using keys. *1)
70.4020
{F4}
For example:70°40'20"
V :
HR:
90°10'20"
70°40'20"
0SET HOLD HSET
P1↓
When completed, normal measuring from the
required Horizontal angle is possible.
*1) To enter Alphanumeric characters, see Section 2.4 “How to Enter Alphanumeric Characters”.
3.4 Vertical Angle Percent Grade(%) Mode
Make sure the mode is Angle measurement.
Operating procedure
Operation
1 Press the {F4} (↓) key to get the function on page
{F4}
2.
2 Press the {F3} (V%) key. *1)
{F3}
Display
V :
HR:
90°10'20"
70°40'20"
0SET HOLD HSET
P1↓
TILT
P2↓
REP
V%
V : -0.30
%
HR: 170°30'20"
TILT
REP
V%
*1) Every time pressing the {F3} (V%) key, the display mode switches.
 When the measurement is carried out over ±45° (±100%) from the horizontal, the display shows
<OVER>.
3-3
P2↓
3 ANGLE MEASUREMENT
3.5 Repetition Angle Measurement

•
Repetition angle measurement can be done by horizontal angle right measurement mode.
Make sure the mode is Horizontal Angle Right measurement.
Operating procedure
Operation
1 Press the {F4} (↓) key to get the function on page
{F4}
2.
2 Press the {F2} (REP)key.
{F2}
Display
V :
HR:
0SET HOLD HSET
P1↓
TILT
P2↓
{F3}
4 Collimate the target A and press the {F1} (0SET)
key.
5 Press the {F3} (YES) key.
6 Collimate the target B using the horizontal clamp
and tangent screw.
Press the {F4} (HOLD) key.
7 Recollimate target A using the horizontal clamp
and tangent screw, and press the {F3} (REL)key.
8 Recollimate target B using the horizontal clamp
and tangent screw, and press the {F4} (HOLD)
key.
9 Repeat 7 to 8 to measure the desired number of
repetitions.
Collimate A
{F1}
REP
V%
REPETITION ANGLE
>OK?
---
3 Press the {F3} (YES) key.
90°10'20"
170°30'20"
---
[YES][NO]
REP-ANGLE COUNT[ 0]
Ht:
0°00'00"
Hm:
0SET V/H REL HOLD
REPETITION ANGLE
INITIALIZE
>OK?
--- --- [YES][NO]
{F3}
REP-ANGLE COUNT[ 0]
Ht:
0°00'00"
Hm:
0SET V/H REL HOLD
Collimate B
{F4}
REP-ANGLE COUNT[ 1]
Ht:
45°10'00"
Hm:
45°10'00"
0SET V/H REL HOLD
Collimate A
{F3}
REP-ANGLE COUNT[ 1]
Ht:
45°10'00"
Hm:
45°10'00"
0SET V/H REL HOLD
Collimate B
{F4}
REP-ANGLE COUNT[ 2]
Ht:
90°20'00"
Hm:
45°10'00"
0SET V/H REL HOLD
REP-ANGLE COUNT[ 4]
Ht: 180°40'00"
Hm:
45°10'00"
0SET V/H REL HOLD
[Example] 4 measurement
3-4
3 ANGLE MEASUREMENT
10 To return to the normal angle mode, press the {F2}
(V/H) key or {ESC} key.
11 Press the {F3} (YES) key.
{ESC}
or
{F2}
{F3}
REPETITION ANGLE
Exit
>OK?
--- --- [YES][NO]
V :
HR:
90°10'20"
170°30'20"
0SET HOLD HSET P1↓
 Horizontal angle can be accumulated up to (3600°00'00" – minimum reading) (horizontal angle right).
In case of 5 second reading, horizontal angle can be accumulated up to +3599°59'55".
 Error will be displayed when the results differ from first measurement by more than ±30".
3.6 Buzzer Sounding for Horizontal Angle 90° Increments
When the horizontal angle falls in the range of less than ± 1° of 0°, 90°, 180° or 270°, the buzzer
sounds. Buzzer stops only when the horizontal angle is adjusted to 0°00’00”, 90°00’00”, 180°00’00” or
270°00’00”.
This setting is not memorized after powering off. Refer to 17 “SELECTING MODE” to set the initial
setting (memorized after powering off).
Make sure the mode is Angle measurement.
Operating procedure
Operation
1 Press the {F4} (↓) key twice to get the function
{F4}
twice
on page 3.
2 Press the {F1} (H-BZ) key.
{F1}
The data previously set is shown.
Display
V :
HR:
90°10'20"
170°30'20"
0SET
HOLD
H-BZ
R/L
HSET P1↓
CMPS
P3↓
H-ANGLE BUZZER [OFF]
[ON] [OFF] --- ENTER
3 Press the {F1} (ON) key or {F2} (OFF) key to
{F1}
or
{F2}
select the buzzer ON/OFF.
H-ANGLE BUZZER [ON]
[ON] [OFF] --- ENTER
4 Press the {F4} (ENTER) key.
{F4}
V :
HR:
90°10'20"
170°30'20"
0SET HOLD HSET
3-5
P1↓
3 ANGLE MEASUREMENT
3.7 Compasses (vertical angle)
Vertical angle is displayed as shown below.
+90°
0°
0°
-90°
Operating procedure
Operation
1 Press the {F4} (↓) key twice to get the function
{F4}
twice
on page 3.
2 Press the {F3} (CMPS) key. *1)
{F3}
Display
V :
HR:
98°10'20"
170°30'20"
0SET HOLD HSET
P1↓
H-BZ R/L
P3↓
V :
HR:
- 8°10'20"
170°30'20"
H-BZ R/L
*1) Every time pressing the {F3} (CMPS) key, the display mode switches.
3-6
CMPS
CMPS
P3↓
4 DISTANCE MEASUREMENT
4
DISTANCE MEASUREMENT
 CAUTION
•
When using the Laser-pointer function, be sure to turn OFF the output laser after distance
measurement is completed. Even if distance measurement is canceled, the Laser-pointer function
is still operating and the laser beam continues to be emitted.

•
•
•
•
Make sure that the target setting on the instrument matches the type of target used. ES
automatically adjusts the intensity of the laser beam and switches the distance measurement
display range to match the type of target used. If the target does not correspond to the target
settings, accurate measurement results cannot be obtained.
Accurate measurement results cannot be obtained if the objective lens is dirty. Dust it off with the
lens brush first, to remove minute particles. Then, after providing a little condensation by breathing
on the lens, wipe it off with the wiping cloth.
During reflectorless measurement, if an object obstructs the light beam used for measurement or
an object is positioned with a high reflective factor (metal or white surface) behind the target,
accurate measurement results may not be received.
Scintillation may affect the accuracy of distance measurement results.
Should this occur, repeat measurement several times and use the averaged value of the obtained
results.
 Target type (Prism mode / Non-prism Mode / Sheet mode)
Measurement mode can be selected depending on the object to measure; prism mode, non-prism
mode (objects other than prism), and sheet mode.
 Regardless of whether the laser pointer is used, measurement is possible with both the non-prism
mode, sheet mode and the prism mode. That is, when the ES is used in the open air, in an urban
area, etc., the laser pointer can be stopped and distance measurement then conducted, making it
possible to prevent the laser light from hitting a third party.
 For measurement with a prism, be sure to measure with the prism mode. If you measure with the
non-prism mode and sheet mode accuracy cannot be guaranteed.
 Non-prism mode enable all distance measurements such Distance measurement, Coordinate
measurement, Offset measurement and Layout.
 To switch over Prism mode to Non-prism mode or sheet mode, press the [NP/P] soft key in each
measurement display.
When selecting non-prism or sheet mode, the icon on the right side of the screen indicates the
currently selected mode.
Non-prism mode: [ NP ]
Sheet mode: [ ]
Changing mode shall be done before measurement.
Example
Distance measurement mode
Coordinate measurement mode
HR: 120°30'40"
HD*
65.432 mNP
Non-prism
VD:
12.345 m
mode
MEAS MODE NP/P P1↓
indicator
N:
120.456 m
E:
34.567 m NP
Z:
12.345 m
MEAS MODE NP/P P1↓
To change the mode, press the [NP/P] soft key in each measurement.
 It is possible to set Non-prism mode for distance measurement during the power on time. Refer
to 16.SELECTING MODE to set the option.
 If happened collimating the near distance prism in Non-prism mode, measurement will not be done
because of too much light.
4-1
4 DISTANCE MEASUREMENT
4.1 Setting of the Atmospheric Correction
When setting the atmospheric correction, obtain the correction value by measuring the temperature
and pressure. Refer to Section 12.2 “Setting of Atmospheric Correction Value”.
4.2 Setting of the Correction for Prism Constant
Topcon’s prism constant value is 0. Set correction for prism at 0. If the prism is of another manufacture,
the appropriate constant shall be set beforehand. Refer to Chapter 11 “SETTING THE PRISM
CONSTANT VALUE”. The setting value is kept in the memory even after power is off.

•
Confirm that Non-prism correction value is set at zero before measurement target such as a wall in
Non-prism mode or sheet mode.
4.3 Distance Measurement (Continuous Measurement)
Make sure the mode displays angle measurement.
Operating procedure
Operation
1 Collimate the center of prism.
Collimate P
Display
V : 90°10'20"
HR: 120°30'40"
0SET HOLD HSET P1↓
2 Press the {
} key.
Distance measurement starts. *1),2)
{
}
The measured distances are shown. *3)~*5)
HR: 120°30'40"
HD*[r]
<< m
VD:
m
MEAS MODE NP/P P1↓
HR: 120°30'40"
HD*
123.456 m
VD:
5.678 m
MEAS MODE NP/P P1↓
 Pressing the {
} key again, the display
changes to horizontal (HR) and vertical (V)angle
and slope distance(SD). *6)
*
{
}
V : 90°10'20"
HR: 120°30'40"
SD*
131.678 m
MEAS MODE NP/P P1↓
*1) When EDM is working, the " " mark appears in the display.
*2) To change mode from Fine to Coarse or Tracking, refer to section 4.5 “Fine Mode/Tracking Mode/
Coarse Mode”.
To set the distance measurement on when the instrument is powered on, refer to Chapter 17
“SELECTING MODE”.
*3) The distance unit indicator "m" (for meter), "f" (for feet or feet inch) appears and disappears alternatively
with buzzer sounds at every renewal of distance data.
*4) Measurement may repeat automatically in the instrument if the result is affected by shimmer etc.
*5) To return to the normal measuring angle mode from a distance measuring mode, press the {ANG} key.
*6) It is possible to choose the display order (HR, HD, VD) or (V, HR, SD) for initial measuring distance
mode. Refer to Chapter 17 “SELECTING MODE”.
4-2
4 DISTANCE MEASUREMENT
4.4 Distance Measurement (N-time Measurement/Single Measurement)
When the number of times measurement is preset, the ES measures the distance the set number of
times. The average distance will be displayed.
When presetting the number of times as 1, it does not display the average distance, because of single
measurement. Single measurement is set at the factory.
Make sure the mode displays angle measurement.
Operating procedure
Operation
1 Collimate the center of prism.
Display
V :
HR:
90°10'20"
120°30'40"
0SET HOLD HSET
P1↓
2 Press the {
{
}
HR: 120°30'40"
HD*[r]
<< m
VD:
m
MEAS MODE NP/P P1↓
3 Press {F1} (MEAS) key while continuous
{F1}
HR: 120°30'40"
HD*[n]
<< m
VD:
m
MEAS MODE NP/P P1↓
} key.
Continuous measuring starts.*1)
measuring is exceeding. *2)
The average value is displayed and "*" mark
disappears.
 While EDM is working, press {F1} (MEAS) key
again, the mode will be changed to continuous
measuring mode.
HR: 120°30'40"
HD:
123.456 m
VD:
5.678 m
MEAS MODE NP/P P1↓
*1) It is possible to set the measurement mode for N-times measurement mode or continuous
measurement mode when the power is turned on. Refer to Chapter 17 “SELECTING MODE”.
*2) For setting the number of times (N-times) in the measurement, refer to Chapter 17 “SELECTING
MODE”.
 Choose meter /feet / feet+inch unit by soft key
It is possible to change the unit for distance measurement mode by soft key.
This setting is not memorized after power off. Refer to 17 “SELECTING MODE” to set at the
initial setting (memorized after power off).
Operating procedure
Operation
Display
1 Press the {F4} (P1↓) key twice to get the function
{F4}
HR: 120°30'40"
HD*
2.000 m
VD:
3.000 m
MEAS MODE NP/P P1↓
on page 3.
S/A
P2↓
--- m/f/i ---
P3↓
OFSET S.O
2 Press the {F2} (m/f/i) key, the display unit will be
changed.
 Every time pressing the {F2} (m/f/i) key, the unit
mode switches.
4-3
{F2}
HR: 120°30'40"
HD*
6.560 f
VD:
9.845 f
--- m/f/i --P3↓
4 DISTANCE MEASUREMENT
4.5 Fine Mode/Tracking Mode/Coarse Mode
This setting is not memorized after power is off.
Refer to Chapter 17 “SELECTING MODE” to set at the initial setting (memorized after power is off).
Fine Mode
: This is a normal distance measuring mode.
The unit to be displayed can be changed.
Measurement time will vary depending on the unit to be displayed.
Tracking Mode
: This mode measures in shorter time than in fine mode.
It is very useful when tailing the moving object or carrying out stake-out work.
Coarse Mode
: This mode measures in shorter time than in fine mode.
The unit to be displayed can be changed.
To change the unit to be displayed in fine mode, see Chapter 17 “SELECTING MODE” and to
change the unit in course mode, see section 6.4.1 “Setting Minimum Reading”.
For the details of the unit and measurement time in each mode, see Chapter 26
“SPECIFICATIONS”.
Operating procedure
Operation
Display
HR: 120°30'40"
HD*
123.456m
VD:
5.678m
MEAS MODE NP/P P1↓
1 Press the {F2} (MODE) key from the distance
measuring mode.*1)
{F2}
HR: 120°30'40"
HD*
123.456m
VD:
5.678m
FINE TRACK COARSE F
{F1} ~ {F3}
HR: 120°30'40"
HD*
123.456m
VD:
5.678m
MEAS MODE NP/P P1↓
The initial character (F/T/C) of set mode is
displayed. (F:Fine, T:Tracking, C:Coarse)
2 Press the {F1} (FINE) key, {F2} (TRACK) key, or
{F3} (COARSE) key.
*1) To cancel the setting, press the {ESC} key.
4-4
4 DISTANCE MEASUREMENT
4.6 Stake Out (S.O)
The difference between the measured distance and the input stake out distance is displayed.
Measured distance — Stake out distance = Displayed value
In stake out operation, you can select either horizontal distance (HD), relative elevation (VD) and slope
distance (SD)
Operating procedure
1 Press the {F4} (↓) key in the distance measuring
mode to get the function on page 2.
Operation
Display
{F4}
HR: 120°30'40"
HD*
123.456 m
VD:
5.678 m
MEAS MODE NP/P P1↓
OFSET S.O
2 Press the {F2} (S.O) key.
{F2}
The data previously set is shown.
STAKE OUT
HD :
0.000 m
HD
3 Select the measuring mode by pressing the {F1}
to {F3} key.
{F1}
Example: Horizontal distance
P2↓
S/A
VD
SD
---
STAKE OUT
HD =
0.000 m
--- --- [CLR] [ENT]
4 Enter the distance for stake out. *1)
Enter data
{F4}
STAKE OUT
HD :
100.000 m
INPUT --- --- ENTER
5 Collimate the target (Prism).
Collimate P
Measuring starts.
The difference between the measured distance
and the stake out distance is displayed.
6 Move the target until the difference becomes 0m.
HR: 120°30'40"
dHD*[r]
<<
VD:
MEAS MODE NP/P
HR: 120°30'40"
dHD*
23.456 m
VD:
5.678 m
MEAS MODE NP/P P1↓
*1) Refer to section 2.4 “How to Enter Alphanumeric Characters”.
 To return to normal distance measurement mode, stake out distance to "0" or turn the power off.
4-5
m
m
P1↓
4 DISTANCE MEASUREMENT
4.7 Offset Measurement
There are four offset measurement modes in the Offset Measurement.
 Angle offset
 Distance offset
 Plane offset
 Column offset
To show the offset measurement menu, press the [OFSET] soft key from distance or coordinate
measurement mode.
Example:
Coordinate measurement
Distance measurement
HR:
HD:
VD:
MEAS
N:
E:
Z:
MEAS
120°30'40"
123.456 m
5.678 m
MODE NP/P P1↓
OFSET S.O
S/A
123.456
34.567
78.912
MODE NP/P
R.HT INSHT
P2↓
m
m
m
P1↓
OCC
OFSET m/f/i S/A
P2↓
P3↓
Press the {F1} (OFSET) key.
Press the {F1} (OFSET) key.
Offset Measurement Menu
OFFSET
1/2
F1:ANG. OFFSET
F2:DIST. OFFSET
F3:PLANE OFFSET P↓
{F4}
OFFSET
2/2
F1:COLUMN OFFSET
P↓
 Outputting the Measurement Data
The results of offset measurement can be output to external device.
Setting the function of the {ESC} key to (REC), the {F3} soft key which assigned (REC) will appear in
measured result display.
Refer to Chapter 17 “SELECTING MODE” to set this option.
OFFSET-MEASUREMENT
HR: 120°30'40"
SD:
123.456 m
NEXT --- REC --{F3}
 Distance measurement mode of the offset measurement
Offset measurement will be done by N-time fine measurement mode.
For setting measuring times refer to Chapter 17 “SELECTING MODE”.
4-6
4 DISTANCE MEASUREMENT
4.7.1 Angle Offset
This mode is useful when it is difficult to set up the prism directly, for example at the center of a tree.
Place the prism at the same horizontal distance from the instrument as that of point A0 to measure.
To measure the coordinates of the center position, operate the offset measurement after setting the
instrument height/prism height.
When measuring coordinates of ground point A1
:Set the instrument height/prism height.
When measuring coordinates of point A0: Set the
instrument height only. (Set the prism height to 0).
Prism P
Prism height
When sighting to A0, you can select one of two
ways. One is to fix vertical angle to the prism
position even updown the telescope position, and
the other is to gear vertical angle to the updown of
telescope movement. In case following the
vertical angle to the movement of telescope,
SD(Slope Distance) and VD(Vertical Distance)
will be changed according to the movement of
telescope.
To set this option, refer to Chapter 17
“SELECTING MODE”.
Instrument height
Occ. Point

•
•
Set the instrument height/prism height before proceeding to the offset measurement mode.
When setting the coordinate value for the occupied station, refer to Section 5.1 “Setting Coordinate
Values of Occupied Point”.
Operating procedure
Operation
Display
1 Press the {F4} (P1↓) key from distance measuring
{F4}
HR: 120°30'40"
HD:
123.456 m
VD:
5.678 m
MEAS MODE NP/P P1↓
OFSET S.O S/A P2↓
2 Press the {F1} (OFSET) key.
{F1}
OFFSET
1/2
F1:ANG.OFFSET
F2:DIST.OFFSET
F3:PLANE OFFSET P1↓
3 Press the {F1} (ANG. OFFSET) key.
{F1}
OFFSET-MEASUREMENT
HR: 120°30'40"
HD:
m
MEAS --- NP/P ---
mode to get the function on page 2.
4 Collimate prism P, and press the {F1} (MEAS) key.
4-7
Collimate P
{F1}
OFFSET-MEASUREMENT
HR: 110°20'30"
HD* [n]
<< m
>Measuring...
4 DISTANCE MEASUREMENT
The horizontal distance from the instrument to the
prism will be measured.
5 Collimate point A0 using the horizontal motion
OFFSET-MEASUREMENT
HR:
110°20'30"
HD:
56.789 m
NEXT --- --- --Collimate
A0
clamp and horizontal tangent screw.
OFFSET-MEASUREMENT
HR:
113°30'50"
HD:
56.789 m
NEXT --- --- ---
6 Show the relative elevation of point A0.
{
}
OFFSET-MEASUREMENT
HR:
113°20'30"
VD:
3.456 m
NEXT --- --- ---
7 Show the slope distance of point A0.
{
}
OFFSET-MEASUREMENT
HR:
113°20'30"
SD:
56.894 m
NEXT --- --- ---
{
}
OFFSET-MEASUREMENT
HR:
113°20'30"
N :
-12.345 m
NEXT --- --- ---
 Each time pressing the {
} key, horizontal
distance, relative elevation and slope distance are
shown in sequence.
8 Show N coordinate of point A0 or A1.
 Each time pressing {
} key, N,E and Z
coordinate are shown in sequence.
 To return to procedure 4, press the {F1} (NEXT) key.
 To return to the previous mode, press the {ESC} key.
 Press the {F3} (NP/P) key after the step 3 to change target type.
4-8
4 DISTANCE MEASUREMENT
4.7.2 Distance Offset Measurement
The measurement of a place apart from a prism is possible by inputting offset horizontal distance of
front and back / right and left.
Forward HD
oHD sign
A0
RorLHD
A1
Prism height
Prism P
Instrument height
Occ.Point
When measuring coordinates of ground point A1:
When measuring coordinates of point A0:
Set the instrument height / prism height.
Set the instrument height only.
(Set the prism height to 0).
Operating procedure
Operation
Display
1 Press the {F4} (P1↓) key from distance measuring
{F4}
HR: 120°30'40"
HD:
123.456 m
VD:
5.678 m
MEAS MODE NP/P P1↓
OFSET S.O
S/A P2↓
2 Press the {F1} (OFSET) key.
{F1}
OFFSET
1/2
F1:ANG. OFFSET
F2:DIST. OFFSET
F3:PLANE OFFSET P↓
3 Press the {F2} (DIST. OFFSET) key.
{F2}
DISTANCE OFFSET
INPUT RorL HD
oHD=
m
--- --- [CLR] [ENT]
Enter HD
{F4}
DISTANCE OFFSET
INPUT FORWARD HD
oHD=
m
--- --- [CLR] [ENT]
Enter HD
{F4}
DISTANCE OFFSET
HR: 80°30'40"
HD:
m
MEAS --- NP/P ---
Collimate
P1
{F1}
DISTANCE OFFSET
HR: 80°30'40"
HD* [n]
<< m
>Measuring...
mode to get the function on page 2.
4 Enter Right and Left direction offset value, and
press the {F4} (ENTER) key.
5 Enter Forward direction offset value, and press the
{F4} (ENTER) key.
6 Collimate prism P, and press the {F1} (MEAS) key.
Measuring will start.
4-9
4 DISTANCE MEASUREMENT
After measuring, the result added offset value will
be shown.
7 Show the relative elevation of point P0.
 Each time pressing the {
} key, horizontal
distance, relative elevation and slope distance are
shown in sequence.
DISTANCE OFFSET
HR:
80°30'40"
HD*
10.000 m
NEXT --- --- --{
}
DISTANCE OFFSET
HR:
80°30'40"
VD:
11.789 m
NEXT --- --- --DISTANCE OFFSET
HR:
80°30'40"
SD:
11.789 m
NEXT --- --- ---
 Show coordinate of point P0.
{
}
 To return to procedure 4, press {F1} (NEXT) key.
 To return to the previous mode, press {ESC} key.
 Press the {F3} (NP/P) key after the step 3 to change target type.
4-10
N :
E :
Z :
NEXT
12.345
23.345
1.345
--- ---
m
m
m
---
4 DISTANCE MEASUREMENT
4.7.3 Plane Offset Measurement
Measuring will be taken for the place where direct measuring can not be done, for example distance or
coordinate measuring for a edge of a plane.
Three random prism points (P1, P2, P3) on a plane will be measured at first in the plane offset
measurement to determine the measured plane. Collimate the measuring target point (P0) then the
instrument calculates and displays coordinate and distance value of cross point between collimation
axis and of the plane.
P
Edge
P
P2
P3
Target heights of P1 to P3 is set to zero automatically.
When setting the coordinate value for the occupied station, refer to Section 5.1 “Setting Coordinate
Values of Occupied Point”.
Example: Non-prism measurement
Operating procedure
Operation
Display
1 Press the {F4} (P1↓) key from distance measuring
{F4}
HR: 120°30'40"
HD:
123.456 m
VD:
5.678 m
MEAS MODE NP/P P1↓
OFSET S.O
S/A P2↓
2 Press the {F1} (OFSET) key.
{F1}
OFFSET
1/2
F1:ANG. OFFSET
F2:DIST. OFFSET
F3:PLANE OFFSET P↓
3 Press the {F3} (PLANE OFFSET) key.
{F3}
PLANE
N001#:
SD:
MEAS ---
mode to get the function on page 2.
4 Press the {F3} (NP/P) key to change to the nonprism mode.
5 Collimate first point P1, and press the {F1}
(MEAS) key.
N-time measuring will start.
After measuring, the display will show the second
point measurement.
4-11
{F3}
Collimate
P1
{F1}
PLANE
N001#:
SD:
MEAS ---
m
NP/P --N
P
m
NP/P ---
PLANE
N001#:
SD* [n]
<< m
>Measuring...
N
P
4 DISTANCE MEASUREMENT
6 Measure the second and third points in the same
way.
Collimate
P2
{F1}
Collimate
P3
{F1}
The instrument calculates and displays coordinate
and distance value of cross point between
collimation axis and of the plane. *1), 2)
7 Collimate the edge (P0) of the plane. *3), 4)
Collimate
P0
8 To show the slope distance (SD), press the {
}
key.
 Each time pressing the {
} key, horizontal
distance, relative elevation and slope distance are
shown in sequence.
 To show coordinate of point P0, press the {
}
key.
PLANE
N002#:
SD:
MEAS --PLANE
N003#:
SD:
MEAS ---
N
P
m
NP/P ---
N
P
m
NP/P ---
HR:
HD:
VD:
EXIT
80°30'40"
54.321 m NP
10.000 m
HR:
HD:
VD:
EXIT
75°30'40"
54.600 m NP
-0.487 m
V :
HR:
SD:
EXIT
90°30'40"
75°30'40" NP
56.602 m
9 To escape the measuring, press the {F1} (EXIT)
key. The display returns to the previous mode.
*1) In case the calculation of plane was not successful by the measured three points, error displays. Start
measuring over again from the first point.
*2) Data display is the mode beforehand of offset measurement mode.
*3) Error will be displayed when collimated to the direction which does not cross with the determined plane.
*4) The point height of the target point P0 is set to zero automatically.
4-12
4 DISTANCE MEASUREMENT
4.7.4 Column Offset Measurement
If it is possible to measure circumscription point (P1) of column directly, the distance to the center of the
column (P0), coordinate and direction angle can be calculated by measured circumscription points (P2)
and (P3).
The direction angle of the center of the column is 1/2 of total direction angle of circumscription points
(P2) and (P3).
P
P2
P3
P
When setting the coordinate value for the occupied station, refer to Section 5.1 “Setting Coordinate
Values of Occupied Point”.
Example: Non-prism measurement
Operating procedure
Operation
Display
1 Press the {F4} (P1↓) key from distance measuring
{F4}
HR: 120°30'40"
HD:
123.456 m
VD:
5.678 m
MEAS MODE NP/P P1↓
OFSET S.O
S/A P2↓
2 Press the {F1} (OFSET) key.
{F1}
OFFSET
1/2
F1:ANG. OFFSET
F2:DIST. OFFSET
F3:PLANE OFFSET P↓
3 Press the {F4} (P↓) key.
{F4}
OFFSET
2/2
F1:COLUMN OFFSET
mode to get the function on page 2.
P↓
4 Press the {F1} (COLUMN OFFSET) key.
{F1}
COLUMN OFFSET
Center
HD:
m
MEAS --- NP/P ---
5 Press the {F3} (NP/P) key to change to the non-
{F3}
COLUMN OFFSET
N
Center
P
HD:
m
MEAS --- NP/P ---
prism mode.
4-13
4 DISTANCE MEASUREMENT
6 Collimate the center of the column (P1) and press
the {F1} (MEAS) key.
N-time measuring will start.
After the measurement, angle measuring display
of the left side (P2) will be shown.
7 Collimate the left side of the column (P2) and
press the {F4} (SET) key.
After the measurement, angle measuring display
of the right side (P3) will be shown.
8 Collimate the right side of the column (P3) and
press the {F4} (SET) key.
Collimate
P1
{F1}
COLUMN OFFSET
Center
HD* [n]
<< m
>Measuring...
Collimate
P2
{F4}
COLUMN OFFSET
N
Left
P
HR: 120°30'40"
--- --- --- SET
Collimate
P3
{F4}
COLUMN OFFSET
N
Right
P
HR: 180°30'40"
--- --- --- SET
The distance between the instrument and center
of the column (P0) will be calculated.
9 To show the relative elevation (VD), press the
{
} key.
Each time pressing the {
} key, horizontal
distance, relative elevation and slope distance are
shown in sequence.
 To show coordinate of point P0, press the {
}
key.
10 To escape the measuring, press the {ESC} key.
The display returns to the previous mode.
4-14
N
P
COLUMN OFFSET
HR: 150°30'40" NP
HD:
43.321 m
NEXT --- --- --{
}
COLUMN OFFSET
HR: 150°30'40" NP
VD:
2.321 m
NEXT --- --- ---
5 COORDINATE MEASUREMENT
5
COORDINATE MEASUREMENT
5.1 Setting Coordinate Values of Occupied Point
Set the coordinates of the instrument (occupied point) according to coordinate origin, and the
instrument automatically converts and displays the unknown point (prism point) coordinates following
the origin.
It is possible to retain the coordinates of the occupied point after turning the power off.
Refer to Chapter 17 “SELECTING MODE”.
Prism (n,e,z)
N
z
n
Occupied point C
Origin(0,0,0)
E
e
Operating procedure
Operation
1 Press the {F4} (↓) key from the coordinate
measurement mode to get the function on page 2.
2 Press the {F3} (OCC) key.
3 Enter N coordinate value. *1)
Display
{F4}
N:
123.456
E:
34.567
Z:
78.912
MEAS MODE NP/P
R.HT INSHT OCC
{F3}
N=
0.000 m
E:
0.000 m
Z:
0.000 m
--- --- [CLR] [ENT]
Enter data
{F4}
N:
-72.000 m
E=
0.000 m
Z:
0.000 m
--- --- [CLR] [ENT]
4 Enter E and Z coordinate values in the same
m
m
m
P1↓
P2↓
N:
51.456 m
E:
34.567 m
Z:
78.912 m
MEAS MODE NP/P P1↓
manner.
After entering the values, the display returns
coordinate measuring display.
*1) Refer to Section 2.4 “How to Enter Alphanumeric Characters”.
 Input range –99999999.9990 < N,E,Z < 99999999.9990 m
–99999999.999 < N,E,Z < 99999999.999 ft.
–99999999.11.7 < N,E,Z < 99999999.11.7 ft.+inch
5-1
5 COORDINATE MEASUREMENT
5.2 Setting Height of the Instrument
It is possible to retain the height of instrument after turning the power off.
Refer to Chapter 17 “SELECTING MODE”.
Operating procedure
Operation
1 Press the {F4} (↓) key from the coordinate
measurement mode to get the function on page 2.
2 Press the {F2} (INSHT) key.
The current value is displayed.
3 Enter the instrument height. *1)
Display
{F4}
N:
123.456
E:
34.567
Z:
78.912
MEAS MODE NP/P
R.HT INSHT OCC
{F2}
INSTRUMENT HEIGHT
INPUT
INS.HT=0.000 m
--- --- [CLR] [ENT]
Enter Inst.HT
{F4}
N:
E:
Z:
MEAS
123.456
34.567
78.912
MODE NP/P
m
m
m
P1↓
P2↓
m
m
m
P1↓
*1) Refer to Section 2.4 “How to Enter Alphanumeric Characters”.
 Input range –999.9999 < Instrument height < 999.9999 m
–999.999 < Instrument height < 999.999 ft.
–999.11.7 < Instrument height < 999.11.7 ft.+inch
5.3 Setting Height of Target (Prism Height)
This mode can be used to obtain Z coordinate values. It is possible to retain the height of target after
turning the power off. Refer to Chapter 17 “SELECTING MODE”.
Operating procedure
Operation
1 Press the {F4} (↓) key from the coordinate
measurement mode to get the function on page 2.
2 Press the {F1} (R.HT) key.
The current value is displayed.
3 Enter the prism height. *1)
{F4}
N:
123.456
E:
34.567
Z:
78.912
MEAS MODE NP/P
R.HT INSHT OCC
{F1}
REFLECTOR HEIGHT
INPUT
R.HT =0.000 m
--- --- [CLR] [ENT]
Enter R. HT
{F4}
*1) Refer to Section 2.4 “How to Enter Alphanumeric Characters”.
 Input range –999.9999 < Prism height < 999.9999 m
–999.999 < Prism height < 999.999 ft.
–999.11.7 < Prism height < 999.11.7 ft.+inch
5-2
Display
N:
E:
Z:
MEAS
123.456
34.567
78.912
MODE NP/P
m
m
m
P1↓
P2↓
m
m
m
P1↓
5 COORDINATE MEASUREMENT
5.4 Execution of Coordinate Measuring
Measure the coordinates by entering the instrument height and prism height, coordinates of unknown
point will be measured directly.
When setting coordinate values of occupied point, see Section 5.1 “Setting Coordinate Values of
Occupied Point”
When setting the instrument height and prism height, see Section 5.2 “Setting Height of the
Instrument” and 5.3 “Setting Height of Target (Prism Height)”.
The coordinates of the unknown point are calculated as shown below and displayed:
Coordinates of occupied point
: (N0, E0,Z0)
Instrument height : INS.HT
Prism height
: R.HT
Vertical distance (Relative elevation) : z (VD)
Coordinates of the center of the prism,
originated from the center point of the instrument : (n,e,z)
Coordinates of unknown point : (N1,E1,Z1)
N1=N0+n
E1=E0+e
Z1=Z0+INS.HT+z - R.HT
Coordinates of the center of the prism, originated from the
center point of the instrument (n, e, z)
Center point of the instrument
(No, Eo, Zo+INS.HT)
Unknown point
(N1, E1, Z1)
Occupied point (No, Eo, Zo)
Origin (o, o, o)
Operating procedure
Operation
1 Set the direction angle of known point A. *1)
2 Collimate target prism.
3 Press the {
} key.
Measuring starts.
Display
Set direction
angle
V : 90°10'20"
HR: 120°30'40"
Collimate P
0SET
{
}
HOLD
HSET P1↓
N*[r]
E:
Z:
MEAS MODE
<< m
m
m
NP/P P1↓
N*
E:
Z:
MEAS
The result will be shown.
123.456
34.567
78.912
MODE NP/P
m
m
m
P1↓
*1) Refer to Section 3.3 “Measuring from the Required Horizontal Angle”.
 In case the coordinate of instrument point is not entered, (0,0,0) will be used as the default for the
instrument point.
The instrument height will be calculated as 0 when the instrument height is not entered.
 The prism height will be calculated as 0 when the prism height is not set.
5-3
6 SPECIAL MODE (Menu Mode)
6
SPECIAL MODE (Menu Mode)
By pressing the {MENU} key, the instrument will be in MENU mode.
In this mode, special measuring, setting and adjustment are possible.
Normal measurement mode
{ESC}
{MENU}
MENU
1/4
F1:TOP FIELD
{ESC}
F2:DATA COLLECT
F3:LAYOUT
P↓
{ESC} {F1}
{F2}
{F4
See Chapter 19 “TOP FIELD MODE”.
"DATA COLLECTION MODE"
See Chapter 7 “DATA COLLECTION”.
{F3}
MENU
2/4
{ESC} F1:MEMORY MGR.
F2:PROGRAMS
F3:GRID FACTOR P↓
"TOP FIELD MODE"
"LAYOUT MODE"
See Chapter 8 “LAYOUT”.
{ESC}
{F1}
"MEMORY MANAGER MODE"
See Chapter 9 “MEMORY
MANAGER MODE”.
{F4
Programs
{F2}
PROGRAMS
F1:REM
F2:MLM
F3:Z COORD.
1/2
P↓
Grid factor
{F3}
GRID FACTOR
=1.000000
>MODIFY?[YES][NO]
Reticle illumination
MENU
3/4
F1:ILLUMINATION
{ESC}
F2:PARAMETERS 1
F3:PARAMETERS 2 P↓
{ESC}
{F1}
{F2}
ILLUMINATION[ON:1]
F1:ON
F2:OFF
F3:LEVEL
"SETTING MODE 1"
See Section 6.4 “Setting Mode 1”.
{F3}
"SETTING MODE 2"
See Chapter 9 “MEMORY
MENU
4/4
F1:ADJUSTMENT MODE
F2:CONTRAST ADJ.
P↓
MANAGER MODE”.
{ESC}
{F1}
"ADJUSTMENT MODE"
See Chapter 18 “CHECKS AND
ADJUSTMENTS”.
{F4
Display contrast adjustment
{F2}
CONTRAST ADJUSTMENT
LEVEL:4
↓
6-1
↑
--- ENTER
6 SPECIAL MODE (Menu Mode)
6.1 Application Measurement (PROGRAMS)
6.1.1 Remote Elevation measurement (REM)
To obtain elevation of the point at which setting the target prism is not possible, place the prism at any
point on the vertical line from the target then carry out REM procedure as follows.
Target K
Prism
Prism height
Instrument
1) With prism height (h) input (Example:h=1.5m)
Operating procedure
Operation
1 After pressing the {MENU} key, press the {F4}
{MENU}
{F4}
(P↓) key to get the menu on page 2.
2 Press the {F2} key.
{F2}
Display
MENU
2/4
F1:MEMORY MGR.
F2:PROGRAMS
F3:GRID FACTOR P↓
PROGRAMS
F1:REM
F2:MLM
F3:Z COORD.
1/2
P↓
3 Press the {F1} (REM) key.
{F1}
REM
F1:INPUT R.HT
F2:NO R.HT
4 Press the {F1} key.
{F1}
REM-1
<STEP-1>
R.HT =
0.000 m
--- --- [CLR] [ENT]
5 Enter prism height. *1)
Enter R.HT
{F4}
6 Collimate prism.
REM-1
<STEP-2>
HD:
MEAS –––
m
NP/P
–––
Collimate P
7 Press the {F1} (MEAS) key.
{F1}
Measuring starts.
6-2
REM-1
<STEP-2>
HD*[n]
<< m
>Measuring...
6 SPECIAL MODE (Menu Mode)
Horizontal distance (HD) between the instrument
and prism will be shown.
REM-1
<STEP-2>
HD* 123.456 m
>Measuring...
REM-1
VD: 1.500 m
–––
8 Collimate target K.
Collimate K
Vertical distance (VD) will be shown. *2),3)
R.HT HD
–––
REM-1
VD: 10.456 m
–––
R.HT HD
–––
*1) Refer to Section 2.4 “How to Enter Alphanumeric Characters”.
*2) To return to procedure 5, press the {F2} (R.HT) key.
To return to procedure 6, press the {F3} (HD) key.
*3) To return to PROGRAMS Menu, press the {ESC} key.
2) Without prism height input
Operating procedure
Operation
1 After pressing the {MENU} key, press the {F4}
{MENU}
{F4}
(P↓) key to get the menu on page 2.
2 Press the {F2} key.
{F2}
Display
MENU
2/4
F1:MEMORY MGR.
F2:PROGRAMS
F3:GRID FACTOR P↓
PROGRAMS
F1:REM
F2:MLM
F3:Z COORD.
3 Press the {F1} (REM) key.
{F1}
REM
F1:INPUT R.HT
F2:NO R.HT
4 Press the {F2} key.
{F2}
REM-2
<STEP-1>
HD:
MEAS –––
5 Collimate prism.
{F1}
Measuring starts.
Horizontal distance (HD) between the instrument
and prism will be shown.
6-3
P↓
m
NP/P –––
Collimate P
6 Press the {F1} (MEAS) key.
1/2
REM-2
<STEP-1>
HD* [n]
<< m
>Measuring...
REM-2
<STEP-1>
HD* 123.456 m
>Measuring...
6 SPECIAL MODE (Menu Mode)
The prism position will be decided.
REM-2
<STEP-2>
V : 60°45'50"
––– ––– –––
7 Collimate ground point G.
Collimate G
8 Press the {F4} (SET) key.
{F4}
The position of point G will be decided. *1)
REM-2
<STEP-2>
V : 123°45'50"
––– ––– –––
SET
REM-2
VD:
–––
9 Collimate target K.
Collimate K
Vertical distance (VD) will be shown. *2)
6-4
0.000 m
V
HD
–––
REM-2
VD: 10.456 m
–––
*1) To return to procedure 5, press the {F3} (HD) key.
To return to procedure 7, press the {F2} (V) key.
*2) To return to PROGRAMS Menu, press the {ESC} key.
SET
V
HD
–––
6 SPECIAL MODE (Menu Mode)
6.1.2 Missing Line Measurement (MLM)
Measurement for horizontal distance (dHD), slope distance (dSD), elevation (dVD) and horizontal
bearing (HR) between two target prisms.
It is possible to enter the coordinate value directly or calculate from coordinate data file.
MLM mode has two modes.
1: MLM-1 (A-B, A-C) :Measurement is A-B, A-C, A-D,......
2: MLM-2 (A-B, B-C) :Measurement is A-B, B-C, C-D,......
Prism A
Prism B
Instrument
Instrument
Prism C
Prism A
Prism B

•
It is necessary to set the direction angle of the instrument.
[Example] MLM-1 (A-B, A-C)
• Procedure of MLM-2 (A-B, B-C) mode is completely same as MLM-1 mode
Operating procedure
Operation
1 After pressing the {MENU} key, press the {F4}
{MENU}
{F4}
(P↓) key to get the menu on page 2.
2 Press the {F2} key.
{F2}
Display
MENU
2/4
F1:MEMORY MGR.
F2:PROGRAMS
F3:GRID FACTOR P↓
PROGRAMS
F1:REM
F2:MLM
F3:Z COORD.
3 Press the {F2} (MLM) key.
{F2}
MLM
F1:USE FILE
F2:DON’T USE
4 Press the {F1} or {F2} key to select using
{F2}
GRID FACTOR
F1:USE G.F.
F2:DON’T USE
coordinate file.
[Example:F2 : DON’T USE]
6-5
1/2
P↓
6 SPECIAL MODE (Menu Mode)
5 Press the {F1} or {F2} key to select using
GRID FACTOR.
[Example:F2 : DON’T USE]
6 Press the {F1} key.
7 Collimate prism A, and press the {F1} (MEAS) key.
Horizontal distance (HD) between the instrument
and prism A will be shown.
{F2}
MLM
F1:MLM-1(A-B, A-C)
F2:MLM-2(A-B, B-C)
{F1}
MLM-1(A-B, A-C)
<STEP-1>
HD:
m
MEAS R.HT NEZ NP/P
Collimate A
{F1}
MLM-1(A-B, A-C)
<STEP-1>
HD*[n]
<< m
MEAS R.HT NEZ NP/P
MLM-1(A-B, A-C)
<STEP-1>
HD* 123.456 m
MEAS R.HT NEZ NP/P
The prism position will be decided.
MLM-1(A-B, A-C)
<STEP-2>
HD:
m
MEAS R.HT NEZ NP/P
8 Collimate prism B and press the {F1} (MEAS) key.
Horizontal distance (HD) between the instrument
and prism B will be shown.
Collimate B
{F1}
MLM-1(A-B, A-C)
<STEP-2>
HD*[n]
<< m
MEAS R.HT NEZ NP/P
MLM-1(A-B, A-C)
<STEP-2>
HD* 345.678 m
MEAS R.HT NEZ NP/P
The horizontal distance (dHD) and relative
elevation (dVD) between prism A and B.
9 To show slope distance (dSD), press {
} key.
{
10 To measure the distance between points A and C,
press the {F3} (HD). *1)
11 Collimate point C (Prism C) and press the
{F1} (MEAS) key.
Horizontal distance (HD) between the instrument
and prism C will be shown.
6-6
}
{F3}
Collimate
prism C
{F1}
MLM-1(A-B, A-C)
dHD : 123.456 m
dVD : 12.345 m
––– –––
HD
–––
MLM-1(A-B, A-C)
dSD : 124.072 m
HR : 12°34'40"
––– –––
HD
–––
MLM-1(A-B, A-C)
<STEP-2>
HD:
m
MEAS R.HT NEZ NP/P
6 SPECIAL MODE (Menu Mode)
The horizontal distance (dHD) and relative
elevation (dVD) between prism A and C.
MLM-1(A-B, A-C)
dHD : 234.567 m
dVD :
23.456 m
––– –––
HD
–––
12 To measure the distance between points A and D,
repeat procedure 12 to14. *1)
*1) To return to previous mode, press the {ESC} key.
 How to use coordinate data
It is possible to input coordinate value directly or calculate from coordinate data file
Operating procedure
Operation
Display
To use coordinate data file, select “USE FILE”
in step 4.
After procedure 6.
MLM-1(A-B, A-C)
<STEP-1>
HD:
m
MEAS R.HT NEZ NP/P
1 Press the {F3} (NEZ) key.
{F3}
Direct key input display will be shown.
2 Press the {F3} (PT#) key to use coordinate data
file.
Point number input display will be shown.
Pressing the {F3} (HD) key, the display will return
to procedure 6.
After selecting coordinate input mode by pressing
the {F3} (NEZ or PT# or HD) key, press the {F1}
(INPUT) key and enter the data.
6-7
{F3}
N>
0.000
E:
0.000
Z:
0.000
INPUT ––– PT#
m
m
m
ENTER
MLM-1(A-B,A-C)
PT#:__________
INPUT LIST
HD ENTER
6 SPECIAL MODE (Menu Mode)
6.1.3 Setting Z Coordinate of Occupied Point
Occupied point coordinate data and known point actual measuring data are utilized, z coordinate of
occupied point is calculated and reset again.
Known point data and coordinate data can use the coordinate data file.
1) Setting occupied coordinate
[Example setting] Using coordinate data file.
Operating procedure
Operation
1 After pressing {MENU} key, press {F4} (P↓) key to
get the menu on page 2.
2 Press the {F2} key.
{MENU}
{F4}
{F2}
Display
MENU
2/4
F1:MEMORY MGR.
F2:PROGRAMS
F3:GRID FACTOR P↓
PROGRAMS
F1:REM
F2:MLM
F3:Z COORD.
3 Press the {F3} (Z COORD.) key.
{F3}
Z COORD.SETTING
F1:USE FILE
F2:DON’T USE
4 Press the {F1} (USE FILE) key.
{F1}
SELECT A FILE
FN:_________
1/2
P↓
INPUT LIST ––– ENTER
5 Press the {F1} (INPUT) key and enter the File
{F1}
Enter FN
{F4}
Name.
6 Press the {F1} key.
{F1}
Z COORD.SETTING
F1:OCC.PT INPUT
F2:REF.MEAS
OCC.PT
PT#:_________
INPUT LIST NEZ ENTER
7 Press the {F1} (INPUT) key and enter the Point
number. Instrument height setting display will be
shown.
8 Enter the height.
The display returns to Z coordinate menu.
{F1}
Enter PT#
{F4}
INSTRUMENT HEIGHT
INPUT
INS.HT=0.000 m
--- --- [CLR] [ENT]
Enter HT
{F4}
Z COORD.SETTING
F1:OCC.PT INPUT
F2:REF.MEAS
For more information about data file, see Chapter 9 “MEMORY MANAGER MODE” .
6-8
6 SPECIAL MODE (Menu Mode)
2) Z Coordinate Calculation from Known Point Measuring Data
[Example setting] Using coordinate data file
Operating procedure
Operation
1 After pressing {MENU} key, press {F4} (P↓) key to
get the menu on page 2.
2 Press the {F2} key.
{MENU}
{F4}
{F2}
Display
MENU
2/4
F1:MEMORY MGR.
F2:PROGRAMS
F3:GRID FACTOR P↓
PROGRAMS
F1:REM
F2:MLM
F3:Z COORD.
3 Press the {F3} (Z COORD.) key.
{F3}
Z COORD.SETTING
F1:USE FILE
F2:DON’T USE
4 Press the {F1} (USE FILE) key.
{F1}
SELECT A FILE
FN:_________
1/2
P↓
INPUT LIST ––– ENTER
5 Press the {F1} (INPUT) key and enter the File
{F1}
Enter FN
{F4}
Name.
6 Press the {F2} key.
{F2}
Z COORD.SETTING
F1:OCC.PT INPUT
F2:REF.MEAS
NOO1#
PT#:_________
INPUT LIST NEZ ENTER
7 Press the {F1} (INPUT) key and enter the Point
{F1}
Enter PT#
{F4}
Number in coordinate data file.
8 Press the {F3} (YES) key and enter the Point
Number in coordinate data file.
9 Enter the height.
10 Collimate a prism on the point and press the {F1}
(MEAS) key.
Measuring starts. *1)
6-9
N:
E:
Z:
>OK ?
4.356 m
16.283 m
1.553 m
[YES][NO]
{F3}
REFLECTOR HEIGHT
INPUT
R.HT =0.000 m
--- --- [CLR] [ENT]
Enter R. HT
{F4}
REFLECTOR HEIGHT
INPUT
R.HT :
0.000 m
MEAS ––– NP/P –––
Collimate P
{F1}
HR: 120°30'40"
HD*[n]
<< m
VD:
m
>Measuring...
6 SPECIAL MODE (Menu Mode)
HR: 120°30'40"
HD:
12.345 m
VD:
23.456 m
NEXT ––– ––– CALC
11 Press the {F4} (CALC) key.*2)
Z : Z coordinate
dZ: Standard deviation
12 Press the {F4} (SET) key. *3)
Z coordinate of the occupied point will be set.
{F4}
Z COORD. SETTING
Z :
1.234 m
dZ :
0.002 m
––– –––
BS SET
{F4}
BACKSIGHT
HR: 23°20'40"
Bascksight point measuring screen will be shown.
13 Press the {F3} (YES) key.
>OK?
{F3}
Horizontal angle will be set.
The display returns to Programs 1/2 menu.
*1) Measurement is Fine N-times measurement mode.
*2) To measure other points, press the {F1} (NEXT) key.
*3) Pressing the {F3} key, the display will be changed alternately.
6-10
[YES][NO]
PROGRAMS
F1:REM
F2:MLM
F3:Z COORD.
1/2
P↓
6 SPECIAL MODE (Menu Mode)
6.1.4 Area Calculation
This mode calculate the area of a closed figure.
There are two area calculation methods as follows.
1) Area Calculation from Coordinate data file
2) Area Calculation from Measured data

•
•
•
•
Area is not calculated correctly if enclosed lines cross each other.
It is impossible to calculate what a mix of coordinate file data and measured data.
If the coordinate data file does not exist, the area calculation from measured data is done
automatically.
The numbers of points used to calculate are not limited.
1) Area Calculation from Coordinate Data File
Operating procedure
Operation
1 After pressing the {MENU} key, press the {F4}
{MENU}
{F4}
(P↓) key to get the menu on page 2/4.
2 Press the {F2} key.
{F2}
3 Press the {F4} (P↓) key to get the PROGRAMS
Display
MENU
2/4
F1:MEMORY MGR.
F2:PROGRAMS
F3:GRID FACTOR P↓
PROGRAMS
F1:REM
F2:MLM
F3:Z COORD.
1/2
P↓
{F4}
PROGRAMS
2/2
F1:AREA
F2:POINT TO LINE
F3:ROAD
P↓
4 Press the {F1} (AREA) key.
{F1}
AREA
F1:FILE DATA
F2:MEASUREMENT
5 Press the {F1} (FILE DATA) key.
{F1}
SELECT A FILE
FN:_________
menu on page 2/2.
INPUT LIST ––– ENTER
6 Press the {F1} (INPUT) key and enter the File
Name.
Initial display will be shown.
7 Press the {F4} (NEXT) key. *1),2)
The top of the file data (DATA-01) will be set and
the second point number will be shown.
8 Repeat pressing the {F4} (NEXT) key to set
{F1}
Enter FN
{F4}
AREA
{F4}
AREA
{F4}
required number of points.
6-11
0000
m.sq
NEXT# :DATA-01
PT# LIST UNIT NEXT
0001
m.sq
NEXT# :DATA-02
PT# LIST UNIT NEXT
6 SPECIAL MODE (Menu Mode)
When 3 or more points are set, the area
surrounded by the points is calculated and the
result will be shown.
AREA
0021
123.456 m.sq
NEXT# :DATA-22
PT# LIST UNIT NEXT
*1) To set specify point, press the {F1} (PT#) key.
*2) To show the list of the coordinate data in the file, press the {F2} (LIST) key.
2) Area Calculation from Measured Data
Operating procedure
Operation
1 After pressing the {MENU} key, press the {F4}
{MENU}
{F4}
(P↓) key to get the menu on page 2/4.
2 Press the {F2} key.
{F2}
3 Press the {F4} (P↓) key to get the PROGRAMS
Display
MENU
2/4
F1:MEMORY MGR.
F2:PROGRAMS
F3:GRID FACTOR P↓
PROGRAMS
F1:REM
F2:MLM
F3:Z COORD.
1/2
P↓
{F4}
PROGRAMS
2/2
F1:AREA
F2:POINT TO LINE
F3:ROAD
P↓
4 Press the {F1} (AREA) key.
{F1}
AREA
F1:FILE DATA
F2:MEASUREMENT
5 Press the {F2} (MEASUREMENT) key.
{F2}
AREA
F1:USE G.F.
F2:DON’T USE
6 Press the {F1} or {F2} key to select using GRID
{F2}
AREA
menu on page 2/2.
FACTOR.
[Example:F2 : DON’T USE]
MEAS
7 Collimate a prism and press the {F1} (MEAS) key.
Measuring starts. *1)
Collimate P
{F1}
0000
m.sq
–––
N*[n]
<<< m
E:
m
Z:
m
>Measuring...
AREA
MEAS
8 Collimate next point and press the {F1} (MEAS)
key.
6-12
Collimate
{F1}
UNIT NP/P
0001
m.sq
–––
UNIT NP/P
6 SPECIAL MODE (Menu Mode)
When 3 or more points are measured, the area
surrounded by the points is calculated and the
result will be shown.
AREA
MEAS
0003
234.567 m.sq
–––
UNIT NP/P
*1) Measurement is Fine N-times measurement mode.
 To change the display unit
It is possible to change the displayed area unit.
Operating procedure
Operation
Display
AREA
0003
100.000 m.sq
MEAS –––
1 Press the {F3} (UNIT) key.
{F3}
AREA
UNIT
NP/P
0003
100.000 m.sq
m.sq ha ft.sq acre
2 Select a unit by pressing the {F1} to {F4} key.
{F2}
Example: {F2} (ha) key.
AREA
0003
0.010 ha
MEAS –––
 m.sq: square meter
ha: hectare
ft.sq: square feet
6-13
acre: acre.
UNIT
NP/P
6 SPECIAL MODE (Menu Mode)
6.1.5 Point to Line Measurement
This mode is used to obtain the coordinate data with the origin point A(0,0,0) and the line AB as N axis.
Place the 2 prisms at the points A and B on the line, and place the instrument at unknown point C. After
measuring the 2 prisms, the coordinate data and the direction angle of the instrument will be calculated
and restored.
P(n, e, z)
Prism P2
Prism P1
R.HT
Line
INS.HT
Instrument Point (Unknown point)
Operating procedure
Operation
1 After pressing the {MENU} key, press the {F4}
{MENU}
{F4}
(P↓) key to get the menu on page 2/4.
2 Press the {F2} key.
{F2}
3 Press the {F4} (P↓) key to get the PROGRAMS
menu on page 2/2.
4 Press the {F2} key.
5 Enter instrument height.
6 Enter reflector A(P1) height.
6-14
Display
MENU
2/4
F1:MEMORY MGR.
F2:PROGRAMS
F3:GRID FACTOR P↓
PROGRAMS
F1:REM
F2:MLM
F3:Z COORD.
1/2
P↓
{F4}
PROGRAMS
2/2
F1:AREA
F2:POINT TO LINE
F3:ROAD
P↓
{F2}
INSTRUMENT HEIGHT
INPUT
INS.HT=0.000
m
--- --- [CLR] [ENT]
Enter
INS.HT
{F4}
REFLECTOR HEIGHT
INPUT
R.HT =0.000
m
--- --- [CLR] [ENT]
Enter R.HT
{F4}
POINT TO LINE
MEAS.P1
HD:
m
MEAS ––– NP/P –––
6 SPECIAL MODE (Menu Mode)
7 Collimate prism P1 (Origin) and press {F1}
Collimate
P1
{F1}
(MEAS) key.
Measuring starts. *1)
Input display of reflector B(P2) height will be
shown.
REFLECTOR HEIGHT
INPUT
R.HT=
0.000 m
--- --- [CLR] [ENT]
8 Enter reflector B(P2) height.
9 Collimate prism B (P2) (Origin) and press the {F1}
(MEAS) key.
Measuring starts. *1)
Enter R. HT
{F4}
POINT TO LINE
MEAS.P2
HD:
m
MEAS ––– NP/P –––
Collimate
P2
{F1}
POINT TO LINE
MEAS.P2
HD*[n]
<< m
>Measuring...
The coordinate data and the direction angle of the
instrument are calculated and restored.
The result (The distance between A and B) will be
displayed.
dHD: Horizontal distance
dVD:Vertical distance
dSD:Slope distance *2),3)
DIST. (P1-P2)
1/2
dHD:
10.000 m
dVD:
0.000 m
NEZ S.CO ––– P↓
10 Press {F1} (NEZ) key to measure other points.
{F1}
11 Collimate a prism and press {F1} (MEAS) key.
Collimate P
{F1}
Coordinate measurement starts. *4)
The result will be shown. *5)
*1)
*2)
*3)
*4)
*5)
POINT TO LINE
MEAS.P1
HD*[n]
<< m
>Measuring...
N:
0.000 m
E:
0.000 m
Z:
0.000 m
MEAS R.HT NP/P –––
>Measuring...
N:
E:
Z:
MEAS R.HT
Measurement is Fine N-times measurement mode.
To show dSD, press {F4} (P↓) key.
To show the new occupied data, press {F2} (S.CO) key.
Measurement is Fine N-times measurement mode.
To return to previous mode, press the {ESC} key.
6-15
3.456 m
5.432 m
0.000 m
NP/P –––
6 SPECIAL MODE (Menu Mode)
6.2 Setting the GRID FACTOR
GRID FACTOR can reset in this menu mode.
For more information, refer to Section 8.1.1 “Setting the GRID FACTOR”.
Grid Factor can be applied to the following application programs.
It is also possible to cancel the Grid factor function by selecting "DON'T USE" in “SELECTING MODE”.
At this time the setting and selecting screens for Grid Factor will be omitted.

Data collection mode
When the NEZ automatic calculation (NEZ AUTO. CALC) is ON, Grid factor will be applied to the
coordinate data (Including PTL data) recorded into a coordinate data file when the RAW data is
measured and recorded. (In this case, Grid Factor is not applied to the RAW data recorded into the
measured data file.)
PTL (Point To Line measurement)
When executing PTL measurement mode, the NEZ Auto Calculation will be turned on compulsorily
and Grid factor will be applied to the coordinate data.
 Layout / ROAD
Execution Layout (Including PTL measurement mode) / ROAD
1. When displaying the difference (dHD) between grid horizontal distance to a layout point (HDg) on
the projection plane and measured ground horizontal distance to a prism point (HD), Grid factor will
be applied to grid distance (HDg) in order to reverse-convert grid distance to ground distance.
2. After completion of a layout point, the displayed coordinate data will be applied to grid factor in order
to compare with surveying data and calculated data on the projection plane.
(NEW POINT-Side Shot)
In side shot method, a new point coordinate data will be applied to grid factor and the new point
coordinate data will be recorded into a coordinate data file.
(NEW POINT - Resection)
In resection method, when a new point calculated coordinate data is displayed or recorded, the new
point coordinate data will be applied to grid factor and the coordinate data will be recorded into a
coordinate data file.
 MLM (Missing Line Measurement)
When selecting grid factor "USE G.F.", measured data will be applied to grid factor. At this time,
horizontal distance (dHD) and slope distance (dSD) will be on the projection plane.
 AREA (Area calculation / Measured method)
When selecting grid factor "USE G.F.", measured data will be applied to grid factor. At this time, the
calculated area will be on the projection plane.

•
Calculation of Z coordinate is not influenced even if it is applied to grid factor.
Operating procedure
Operation
1 After pressing the {MENU} key, press the {F4}
{MENU}
{F4}
(P↓) key to get the menu on page 2.
2 Press the {F3} (GRID FACTOR) key.
{F3}
Display
MENU
2/4
F1:MEMORY MGR.
F2:PROGRAMS
F3:GRID FACTOR P↓
GRID FACTOR
=0.998843
>MODIFY? [YES][NO]
6-16
6 SPECIAL MODE (Menu Mode)
3 Press the {F3} (YES) key.
{F3}
4 Enter Elevation. *1) Press the {F4} (ENT) key.
5 Enter Scale Factor in the same way.
GRID FACTOR
ELEV.=1000 m
SCALE:0.999000
--- --- [CLR] [ENT]
Enter ELEV.
{F4}
Enter Scale
{F4}
Grid Factor is displayed for 1 to 2 second and
display returns to menu.
GRID FACTOR
ELEV.:2000 m
SCALE=1.001000
--- --- [CLR] [ENT]
GRID FACTOR
=1.000686
*1) Refer to Section 2.4 “How to Enter Alphanumeric Characters”.
 Input Range:Elevation : –9,999 to 9,999 meter (–32,805 to 3,2805 ft, ft+in)
Scale Factor: 0.990000 to 1.010000
6.3 Setting Illumination of Display and Cross Hairs
Setting ON/OFF/LEVEL (1 to 5) for illumination of display (LCD) and reticle.
Setting LEVEL (1 to 5) is only for reticle.
[Example setting] LEVEL:2 and turn on the illumination.
Operating procedure
Operation
1 After pressing the {MENU} key, press the {F4}
{MENU}
{F4}
{F4}
(P↓) key twice to get the menu on page 3.
2 Press the {F1} key.
The data previously set is shown.
3 Press the {F3} (LEVEL) key.
Display
MENU
3/4
F1:ILLUMINATION
F2:PARAMETERS 1
F3:PARAMETERS 2 P↓
{F1}
ILLUMINATION [OFF:1]
F1:ON
F2:OFF
F3:LEVEL
{F3}
ILLUMINATION [OFF:1]
[LEVEL MODE]
↓
4 Press the {F2} (↑) key, and then press the {F4}
(ENTER) key.
5 Press the {F1} (ON) key.
{F2}
{F4}
{F1}
 To return to previous mode, press the {ESC} key.
6-17
↑
–––
ENTER
ILLUMINATION [OFF:2]
F1:ON
F2:OFF
F3:LEVEL
ILLUMINATION [ON:2]
F1:ON
F2:OFF
F3:LEVEL
6 SPECIAL MODE (Menu Mode)
6.4 Setting Mode 1
In this mode, the following settings are possible.
1. Setting Minimum Reading
2. Auto Power off
3. Vertical and Horizontal Angle Tilt Correction (Tilt ON/OFF)
4. Systematic Error of Instrument Correction (ES-62/65)
5. Setting for RS-232C communication
6. Selecting Communication Port (Only for built-in Bluetooth model)
7. Confirming the Bluetooth Device Address and Setting the PIN code (Only for built-in Bluetooth
model)

•
This setting is memorized after power off.
6.4.1 Setting Minimum Reading
Select minimum display unit for angle measurement, coarse distance measurement mode.
To select minimum display for fine measurement mode, see Chapter 17 “SELECTING MODE” .
Angle Unit
Models
ES-62/65
Degree
GON
MIL
5" / 1"
1mgon / 0.2mgon
0.1mil / 0.01mil
Coarse mode
Distance unit
Prism mode, Non-Prism mode
10mm (0.02ft)/1mm(0.005ft)
[Example] Minimum angle: 5”, Coarse: 1mm
Operating procedure
Operation
1 After pressing the {MENU} key, press the {F4}
Display
{MENU}
{F4}
{F4}
MENU
3/4
F1:ILLUMINATION
F2:PARAMETERS 1
F3:PARAMETERS 2 P↓
2 Press the {F2} key.
{F2}
PARAMETERS 1
1/2
F1:MINIMUM READING
F2:AUTO POWER OFF
F3:TILT
P↓
3 Press the {F1} key.
{F1}
MINIMUM READING
F1:ANGLE
F2:COARSE
4 Press the {F1} key.
{F1}
MINIMUM ANGLE
[F1: 1"
]
F2: 5"
(P↓) key twice to get the menu on page 3.
ENTER
5 Press the {F2} (5") key and press the {F4}
(ENTER) key.
6 Press the {F2} key.
6-18
{F2}
{F4}
MINIMUM READING
F1:ANGLE
F2:COARSE
{F2}
COARSE READING
F1: 1 mm
[F2:10 mm ]
ENTER
6 SPECIAL MODE (Menu Mode)
7 Press the {F1} key and press the {F4} (ENTER)
key.
{F1}
{F4}
MINIMUM READING
F1:ANGLE
F2:COARSE
 To return to previous mode, press the {ESC} key.
6.4.2 Auto Power Off
If no key operation is given or no process of measurement is performed for more than 30 minutes (No
change exceeding 30” has occurred during horizontal angle or vertical angle measurement.), the power
turns off automatically.
Operating procedure
Operation
1 After pressing the {MENU} key, press the {F4}
Display
{MENU}
{F4}
{F4}
MENU
3/4
F1:ILLUMINATION
F2:PARAMETERS 1
F3:PARAMETERS 2 P↓
2 Press the {F2} key.
{F2}
PARAMETERS 1
1/2
F1:MINIMUM READING
F2:AUTO POWER OFF
F3:TILT
P↓
3 Press the {F2} key.
{F2}
AUTO POWER OFF [OFF]
F1:ON
F2:OFF
ENTER
(P↓) key twice to get the menu on page 3.
The data previously set is shown.
4 Press the {F1} (ON) key or {F2} (OFF) key, and
press the {F4} (ENTER) key.
6-19
{F1}
or
{F2}
{F4}
6 SPECIAL MODE (Menu Mode)
6.4.3 Vertical and Horizontal Angle Tilt correction (Tilt ON/OFF)
In case the instrument is used in an unstable situation, constant indexing of vertical and horizontal
angle may be impossible. In this case, the function of tilt correction can be stopped by selecting TILT
OFF. It has been set to X,Y (V/H) TILT ON at the factory.

•
This setting is memorized after power off.
Operating procedure
Operation
1 After pressing the {MENU} key, press the {F4}
{MENU}
{F4}
{F4}
(P↓) key twice to get the menu on page 3.
Display
MENU
3/4
F1:ILLUMINATION
F2:PARAMETERS 1
F3:PARAMETERS 2 P↓
2 Press the {F2} key.
{F2}
PARAMETERS 1
1/3
F1:MINIMUM READING
F2:AUTO POWER OFF
F3:TILT
P↓
3 Press the {F3} key.
{F3}
TILT SENSOR:[XY-ON ]
X:
0°02'10"
Y:
0°03'00"
X-ON XY-ON OFF ENTER
The data previously set is shown.
If already ON, the display shows tilt correction
value.
4 Press the {F1} (X-ON) key or {F2} (XY-ON) or
{F3} (OFF) key, and press the {F4} (ENTER) key.
{F1} ~ {F3}
{F4}
6.4.4 Systematic Error of Instrument Correction
Setting ON/OFF for error correction of collimation and horizontal axis for angle measurement.

•
Perform this item after complete Section 18.3 “Adjustment of Compensation Systematic Error of
Instrument”.
Operating procedure
Operation
1 After pressing the {MENU} key, press the {F4}
{MENU}
{F4}
{F4}
(P↓) key twice to get the menu on page 2.
Display
MENU
3/4
F1:ILLUMINATION
F2:PARAMETERS 1
F3:PARAMETERS 2 P↓
2 Press the {F2} key.
{F2}
PARAMETERS 1
1/3
F1:MINIMUM READING
F2:AUTO POWER OFF
F3:TILT
P↓
3 Press the {F4} key.
{F4}
PARAMETERS 1
2/3
F1:ERROR CORRECTION
F2:RS-232C
F3:SELECT COM
P↓
6-20
6 SPECIAL MODE (Menu Mode)
4 Press the {F1} key.
{F1}
The data previously set is shown.
ERROR CORR.
F1:ON
F2:OFF
[OFF]
ENTER
5 Press the {F1} (ON) key or {F2} (OFF) key, and
press the {F4} (ENTER) key.
6-21
{F1}
or
{F2}
{F4}
6 SPECIAL MODE (Menu Mode)
6.4.5 Setting RS-232C communication with external device
you can set the parameters for RS-232C communication with external device from parameters setting
menu.
The following parameters can be set.
Item
Baud rate
Character bit/Parity
Stop bit
ACK mode
CR,LF
REC type
Factory setting
Selecting items
1200, 2400, 4800, 9600, 19200, 38400
7/Even, 7/Odd, 8/None
1, 2
Standard, Omitted
ON, OFF
REC-A, REC-B
Baud rate: 1200 baud rate, Character bit/Parity:7/Even, CRLF:OFF,
REC type: REC-A, ACK:Standard
ACK mode, CRLF and REC type are interlocked with the same items in the selecting mode.
Refer to 17 “SELECTING MODE”
Sample setting
STOP BITS: 2
Operating procedure
Operation
Display
{MENU}
{F4}
{F4}
MENU
3/4
F1:ILLUMINATION
F2:PARAMETERS 1
F3:PARAMETERS 2 P↓
2 Press the {F2} key.
{F2}
PARAMETERS 1
1/3
F1:MINIMUM READING
F2:AUTO POWER OFF
F3:TILT
P↓
3 Press the {F4} key.
{F4}
PARAMETERS 1
2/3
F1:ERROR CORRECTION
F2:RS-232C
F3:SELECT COM
P↓
4 Press the {F1} key.
{F1}
RS-232C
1/3
F1:BAUD RATE
F2:CHAR./PARITY
F3:STOP BITS
P↓
{F3}
STOP BITS
[F1:1
F2:2
1 After pressing the {MENU} key, press the {F4}
(P↓) key twice to get the menu on page 2.
The data previously set is shown.
5 Press the {F3} key to select STOP BITS.
The data previously set is marked.
]
ENTER
6 Press the {F2} (2) key to select stop bit 2, and
{F2}
{F4}
press the {F4} (ENTER) key.
6-22
6 SPECIAL MODE (Menu Mode)
6.4.6 Selecting Communication Port
You can change the communication port to BLUETOOTH port (option).
Sample setting
Bluetooth
Operating procedure
Operation
Display
{MENU}
{F4}
{F4}
MENU
3/4
F1:ILLUMINATION
F2:PARAMETERS 1
F3:PARAMETERS 2 P↓
2 Press the {F2} key.
{F2}
PARAMETERS 1
1/3
F1:MINIMUM READING
F2:AUTO POWER OFF
F3:TILT
P↓
3 Press the {F4} key.
{F4}
PARAMETERS 1
2/3
F1:ERROR CORRECTION
F2:RS-232C
F3:SELECT COM
P↓
4 Press the {F3} key.
{F3}
SELECT COM
F1:BLUETOOTH
[F2:RS-232C]
1 After pressing the {MENU} key, press the {F4}
(P↓) key twice to get the menu on page 3.
ENTER
5 Press the {F1} (BLUETOOTH) key to select the
communication port and press the {F4} (ENTER)
key.
The display will return to the previous menu.
6-23
{F1}
{F4}
SELECT COM
[F1:BLUETOOTH]
F2:RS-232C
ENTER
6 SPECIAL MODE (Menu Mode)
6.4.7 Confirming the Bluetooth Device Address and Setting the PIN code
(Only for built-in Bluetooth model)
You can confirm the Bluetooth address and set the PIN code
Operating procedure
Operation
Display
{MENU}
{F4}
{F4}
MENU
3/4
F1:ILLUMINATION
F2:PARAMETERS 1
F3:PARAMETERS 2 P↓
2 Press the {F2} key.
{F2}
PARAMETERS 1
1/3
F1:MINIMUM READING
F2:AUTO POWER OFF
F3:TILT
P↓
3 Press the {F4} key.
{F4}
PARAMETERS 1
2/3
F1:ERROR CORRECTION
F2:RS-232C
F3:SELECT COM
P↓
4 Press the {F4} key.
{F4}
PARAMETERS 1
F1:BLUETOOTH
1 After pressing the {MENU} key, press the {F4}
(P↓) key twice to get the menu on page 3.
3/3
P↓
5 Press the {F1} key.
The Bluetooth device address and PIN code will
display.
6 To change the PIN code, press the {F1} (INPUT)
key.
7 Enter a new PIN code and press the {F4}
{F1}
BLUETOOTH
ADDR. :0000E14F49B4
PIN CODE : 1234
INPUT NONE --- ENTER
{F1}
BLUETOOTH
ADDR. :0000E14F49B4
PIN CODE = 2233
--- --- [CLR][ENT]
Enter PIN
code
{F4}
(ENTER) key.

•
•
•
To communicate between the ES and Bluetooth-enabled instrument, it is necessary to make the
PIN codes of both instruments identical.
If two PIN codes don’t coincide, the two instrument cannot communicate each other.
For setting the PIN code of Bluetooth-enabled instrument, see the instrument’s instruction manual.
If you do not use the PIN code, choose “NONE.” (The factory default setting is “NONE.”)
6-24
6 SPECIAL MODE (Menu Mode)
6.5 Setting Contrast of Display
Setting level for contrast of display (LCD)
Operating procedure
1 After pressing the {MENU} key, press the {F4}
(P↓) key three times to get the menu on page 3.
2 Press the {F2} key.
Operation
Display
{MENU}
{F4}
{F4}
{F4}
MENU
4/4
F1:ADJUSTMENT MODE
F2:CONTRAST ADJ.
P↓
{F2}
CONTRAST ADJUSTMENT
LEVEL: 4
↓
3 Press the {F1} (↓) key or {F2} (↑) key, and press
the {F4} (ENTER) key.
6-25
{F1} or {F2}
{F4}
↑
–––
ENTER
6 SPECIAL MODE (Menu Mode)
6.6 ROAD
 Road menu operation
PROGRAMS
2/2
F1:AREA
F2:POINT TO LINE
F3:ROAD
P↓
Press {F3} key
ROAD
F1:INPUT DATA
F2:SETOUT
F3:INITIALIZE
Input start point
{F1} INPUT DATA
F1:START POINT
F2:H ALIGNMENT
{F1}
START POINT
N >
0.000
m
E :
0.000
m
INPUT --- --- ENTER
Input road data
H ALIGNMENT
F1:DATA INPUT
F2:DATA SEARCH
{F2}
F1:LINE
{F1}
F2:CURVE
F3:SPIRAL
F4:POINT
LINE
L >
AZ:
INPUT ---
01
0.000
m
0°00’00”
--- ENTER
{F2}
CURVE
R >
L :
INPUT ---
02
0.000 m
0.000 m
--- ENTER
{F3}
SPIRAL
R >
L :
INPUT ---
03
0.000 m
0.000 m
--- ENTER
{F4}
POINT
N >
E :
INPUT ---
04
0.000 m
0.000 m
--- ENTER
{F1}
Search data
{F2}
DATA SEARCH
F1:FIRST DATA
F2:LAST DATA
Edit data
{F1}
Set OCC and BS
SETOUT
F1:OCC&BS
F2:SETOUT ROAD
{F2}
F3:SELECT A FILE
OCC&BS
{F1}
F1:OCC&BS
F2:RESECTION
{F1}
Set out road
{F2}
Resection
SETOUT ROAD
CHAIN:1000.000
NO01#
PT#:__________
{F2}
INPUT
--- --- ENTER
Select a file
{F3}
SELECT A FILE
FN:__________
INPUT LIST --- ENTER
Initialize ROAD data
INITIALIZE DATA
ERASE ROAD DATA
{F3}
>OK ?
OCC&BS
F1:COORD. DATA
F2:ROAD DATA
[NO][YES]
6-26
INPUT LIST NEZ ENTER
LINE
L :
AZ:
EDIT
01/30
100.000 m
45°00’00”
6 SPECIAL MODE (Menu Mode)
6.6.1 Input Start Point
To input the start point, carry out the following operating procedure.
Operating procedure
Operation
1 After pressing the {MENU} key, press the {F4}
(P↓), {F2}, {F4} key to get the programs menu on
page
2/2.
2 Press the {F3}, {F1}, {F1} key.
(Refer to “Input start point” on page 6-26.)
{MENU}
{F4}
{F2}
{F4}
Display
PROGRAMS
2/2
F1:AREA
F2:POINT TO LINE
F3:ROAD
P↓
{F3}
{F1}
{F1}
START POINT
N =
0.000
m
E :
0.000
m
--- --- [CLR] [ENT]
3 Input coord N, E.
4 Press the {ENT} key.
Input coord
{ENT}
START POINT
CHAIN
= 0.000 m
INTERVAL:100.000 m
--- --- [CLR] [ENT]
5 Input value data CHAIN, INTERVAL.
6 Press the {ENT} key.
Input data
{ENT}
<SET!>
INPUT DATA
F1:START POINT
F2:H ALIGNMENT
 For [ROAD], in addition to the “Start Point” and “Road Data” input files, other files necessary for the
calculations are created. Consequently, if the free area of the memory reaches 10% or less, a
“MEMORY POOR” warning message is displayed. (In this case, the instrument can still be operated.)
 CHAIN and INTERVAL input range
-50,000m≤CHAIN≤500,000m
0m<INTERVAL≤5,000m
6-27
6 SPECIAL MODE (Menu Mode)
6.6.2 Input Road Data
[ROAD] is made up of four types of components: LINE, CURVE, SPIRAL and POINT.
To input the required components, carry out the following operating procedure.
Operating procedure
Operation
1 After pressing the {MENU} key, press the {F4} (P↓),
{F2}, {F4}key to get the programs menu on page 2/
2.
2 Press the {F3}, {F1}, {F2},{F1} key.
(Refer to “Input road data” on page 6-26.)
{MENU}
{F4}
{F2}
{F4}
{F3}
{F1}
{F2}
{F1}
Display
PROGRAMS
2/2
F1:AREA
F2:POINT TO LINE
F3:ROAD
P↓
F1:LINE
F2:CURVE
F3:SPIRAL
F4:POINT
 The amount of input data varies depending on the type of data, up to a maximum of 30.
(In the case of POINT input only, the maximum is 9 points including end point.)
 An error may occur when entering a combination of POINT and other components if the amount of data
entered exceeds the maximum amount allowed for internal calculations. If this happens, please reduce
the amount of input data.
 Input LINE data
Operating procedure
Operation
Display
F1:LINE
F2:CURVE
F3:SPIRAL
F4:POINT
1 To input LINE data, press the {F1} key. *1)
2 Input LENGTH.
3 Press the {ENT} key.
{F1}
LINE
01
L =
0.000
m
AZ:
0°00’00”
--- --- [CLR] [ENT]
Input
LENGTH
LINE
01
L :
100.000 m
AZ=
0°00’00”
--- --- [CLR] [ENT]
{ENT}
4 Input AZIMUTH.
5 Press the {ENT} key.
Input
AZIMUTH
{ENT}
<SET!>
*1) The number at the top right of the screen shows the amount of data currently entered.
6-28
6 SPECIAL MODE (Menu Mode)
 Input CURVE data
Operating procedure
Operation
Display
F1:LINE
F2:CURVE
F3:SPIRAL
F4:POINT
1 To input CURVE data, press the {F2} key. *1)
2 Input RADIUS.
3 Press the {ENT} key.
{F2}
CURVE
02
R =
0.000 m
L :
0.000 m
--- --- [CLR] [ENT]
Input
RADIUS
{ENT}
CURVE
02
R :
100.000 m
L =
0.000 m
--- --- [CLR] [ENT]
Input
LENGTH
4 Input LENGTH.
5 Press the {ENT} key.
{ENT}
6 Select TURN (direction of turn): RIGHT or LEFT.
7 Press the {ENT} key.
Select
{F1} (LEFT)
or
{F2} (RIGHT)
CURVE
TURN > RIGHT
02
LEFT RIGHT --- ENTER
{ENT}
<SET!>
*1) CURVE cannot be input as the first data.
6-29
6 SPECIAL MODE (Menu Mode)
 Input SPIRAL data
Operating procedure
Operation
Display
F1:LINE
F2:CURVE
F3:SPIRAL
F4:POINT
1 To input SPIRAL data, press the {F3} key. *1)
2 Input RADIUS.
3 Press the {ENT} key.
{F3}
SPIRAL
03
R =
0.000 m
L :
0.000 m
--- --- [CLR] [ENT]
Input
RADIUS
{ENT}
SPIRAL
03
R :
100.000 m
L =
0.000 m
--- --- [CLR] [ENT]
Input
LENGTH
{ENT}
4 Input LENGTH.
5 Press the {ENT} key.
6 Select TURN (direction of turn): RIGHT or LEFT.
7 Press the {ENT} key.
Select
{F1} (LEFT)
or
{F2} (RIGHT)
{ENT}
8 Select DIR (direction): IN (entrance) or OUT (exit).
9 Press the {ENT} key.
Select
{F1} (IN)
or
{F2} (OUT)
SPIRAL
03
TURN > RIGHT
DIR : IN
LEFT RIGHT --- ENTER
SPIRAL
03
TURN : LEFT
DIR > IN
IN
OUT --- ENTER
{ENT}
<SET!>
*1) SPIRAL cannot be input as the first data.
6-30
6 SPECIAL MODE (Menu Mode)
 Input POINT data
Operating procedure
Operation
Display
F1:LINE
F2:CURVE
F3:SPIRAL
F4:POINT
1 To input POINT data, press the {F4} key.
2 Input N coord.
3 Press the {ENT} key.
{F4}
POINT
04
N =
0.000 m
E :
0.000 m
--- --- [CLR] [ENT]
Input
N coord
{ENT}
POINT
04
N :
100.000 m
E =
0.000 m
--- --- [CLR] [ENT]
R >
0.000 m
A1:
0.000
A2:
0.000
INPUT --- SKIP ENTER
4 Input E coord.
5 Press the {ENT} key.
Input
E coord
{ENT}
6 Input RADIUS. *1)
7 Press the {ENT} key.
Input
RADIUS
{ENT}
R :
100.000 m
A1>
0.000
A2:
0.000
INPUT --- SKIP ENTER
Input
parameter
A1
{ENT}
R :
100.000 m
A1:
80.000
A2>
0.000
INPUT --- SKIP ENTER
8 Input parameter A1. *1)
9 Press the {ENT} key.
10 Input parameter A2. *1)
11 Press the {ENT} key.
Input
parameter
A2
{ENT}
<SET!>
*1) If the data input is not required, press the [SKIP] key.
 When inputting POINT data, if the next data is not POINT data, ROAD is calculated as a straight line
irrespective of the values for RADIUS, A1 and A2.
6-31
6 SPECIAL MODE (Menu Mode)
6.6.3 Search Data
To search for input data, carry out the following operating procedure.
Operating procedure
Operation
1 After pressing the {MENU} key, press the {F4} (P↓),
{F2}, {F4}key to get the programs menu on page 2/
2.
2 Press the {F3}, {F1}, {F2}, {F2} key.
(Refer to “Search data” on page 6-26.)
{MENU}
{F4}
{F2}
{F4}
{F3}
{F1}
{F2}
{F2}
3 To search from the first data, select {F1} (FIRST
DATA).
4 To switch to different data, press the [↓] or [↑] key.
{F1}
Display
PROGRAMS
2/2
F1:AREA
F2:POINT TO LINE
F3:ROAD
P↓
DATA SEARCH
F1:FIRST DATA
F2:LAST DATA
LINE
L :
AZ:
EDIT
01/30
100.000 m
45°00’00”
↓
[↓] or [↑]
SPIRAL
R :
L :
EDIT
30/30
200.000 m
100.000 m
↓
6.6.4 Edit Data
To edit input data, carry out the following operating procedure.
Operating procedure
Operation
Display
LINE
L :
AZ:
EDIT
1 In DATA SEARCH, press the {F1} key.
{F1}
2 Edit the data.
Edit
data
6-32
01/30
100.000 m
45°00’00”
↓
LINE
01
L =
100.000 m
AZ:
45°00’00”
--- --- [CLR] [ENT]
6 SPECIAL MODE (Menu Mode)
6.6.5 Set OCC and BS
To set the Occupied Point and Backsight Point, carry out the following operating procedure.
Operating procedure
Operation
1 After pressing the {MENU} key, press the {F4} (P↓),
{F2}, {F4}key to get the programs menu on page 2/
2.
2 Press the {F3}, {F2}, {F1} key.
(Refer to “Set OCC and BS” on page 6-26.)
{MENU}
{F4}
{F2}
{F4}
{F3}
{F2}
{F1}
3 Press the {F1} key. *1)
{F1}
4 To input OCC. PT, press
{F2}
the {F1} (COORD. DATA) or {F2} (ROAD DATA)
key.
Display
PROGRAMS
2/2
F1:AREA
F2:POINT TO LINE
F3:ROAD
P↓
OCC&BS
F1:OCC&BS
F2:RESECTION
OCC&BS
F1:COORD. DATA
F2:ROAD DATA
OCC.PT
CHAIN=
--- --- [CLR] [ENT]
COORD. DATA:
Choose the data from Coord Data and set the
Occupied Point.
ROAD DATA:
Create the data from Road Data and set the
Occupied Point.
(Example: ROAD DATA)
5 Input OCC. PT, press the {ENT} key.
Input
OCC. PT
{ENT}
6 Press the {ENT} key.
{ENT}
LEFT or RIGHT: Use the offset point.
CENTER:
Use the center point.
CHAIN:1000.000
>CENTER
LEFT RIGHT --- ENTER
CHAIN:1000.000
N :
0.000 m
E :
0.000 m
>OK ?
[YES][NO]
(Example: CENTER)
7 Press the {F3} (YES) key.
{F3}
BACKSIGHT
CHAIN=
--- --- [CLR] [ENT]
8 Input the backsight.
Input
Backsight
9 Press the {ENT} key.
{ENT}
CHAIN: 0.000
>CENTER
LEFT RIGHT --- ENTER
6-33
6 SPECIAL MODE (Menu Mode)
10 Collimate the backsight.
Collimate
Backsight
BACKSIGHT
H(B)= 45°00’00”
>Sight?
11 Press the {F3} (YES) key.
[YES][NO]
{F3}
<SET!>
SETOUT
F1:OCC&BS
F2:SETOUT ROAD
F3:SELECT A FILE
*1) When setting the Occupied Point and Backsight Point using Resection method, select {F2}
(RESECTION).
For details of the Resection method, refer to Section 8.3.2 “Resection Method”.
6-34
6 SPECIAL MODE (Menu Mode)
6.6.6 Setout Road
To setout the road, carry out the following operating procedure.
Operating procedure
Operation
1 After pressing the {MENU} key, press the {F4} (P↓),
{F2}, {F4}key to get the programs menu on page 2/
2.
2 Press the {F3}, {F2}, {F2} key.
(Refer to “Set out road” on page 6-26.)
{MENU}
{F4}
{F2}
{F4}
{F3}
{F2}
{F2}
Display
PROGRAMS
2/2
F1:AREA
F2:POINT TO LINE
F3:ROAD
P↓
SETOUT ROAD
CHAIN=
--- --- [CLR] [ENT]
3 Input data.
Input
data
SETOUT ROAD
CHAIN=1200
--- --- [CLR] [ENT]
4 Press the {ENT} key.
{ENT}
CHAIN:1200
> CENTER
LEFT RIGHT --- ENTER
5 Select offset.
{F2}
(Example: RIGHT)
Press the {F2} key. *1)
6 Input the offset value.
CHAIN:1200
: RIGHT
=
m
--- --- [CLR][ENT]
Input
offset value
7 Press the {ENT} key.
{ENT}
CHAIN:1200
N :
0.000 m
E :
0.000 m
>OK ?
[YES][NO]
The setout point coordinates are displayed.
8 Press the {F3} (YES) key.
The distance to the setout point and the backsight
are displayed.
{F3}
CALCULATED
HR= 60°00’00”
HD=
100.000 m
ANGLE DIST --- ---
{F1}
CHAIN:1200
HR: 60°00’00”
dHR:
0°00’00”
DIST --- NEZ ---
{F1}
HD*
dHD:
HR: Calculated horizontal angle of the layout point
HD: Calculated horizontal distance from the
instrument to the layout point
9 Press the {F1} (ANG) key.
CHAIN: Layout point
HR: Measured (Actual) horizontal angle.
dHR: Horizontal angle to be turned to the layout
point = Actual horizontal angle - Calculated
horizontal angle.
Correct direction when dHR = 0°00'00"
10 Press the {F1} (DIST) key.
HD: Measuring (Actual) horizontal distance
dHD: Horizontal distance to be turned to the
layout point = Actual horizontal distance –
Calculated horizontal distance.
6-35
MODE
100.000 m
0.000 m
NEZ
NP/P NEXT
6 SPECIAL MODE (Menu Mode)
11 Press the {F3} (NEZ) key.
{F3}
The coordinate data is shown.
N *
E :
MODE
12 Press the {F4} (NEXT) key to set next layout point.
70.000 m
50.000 m
ANG
NP/P NEXT
{F4}
*1) If not selecting offset, press the {ENT} key.
6.6.7 Select a File
To set the coordinates to be used for the Occupied Point and Backsight Point, carry out the following
operating procedure.
Operating procedure
Operation
1 After pressing the {MENU} key, press the {F4} (P↓),
{F2}, {F4}key to get the programs menu on page 2/
2.
{MENU}
{F4}
{F2}
{F4}
Display
PROGRAMS
2/2
F1:AREA
F2:POINT TO LINE
F3:ROAD
P↓
2 Press the {F3}, {F2} key.
(Refer to “Select a file” on page 6-26.)
{F3}
{F2}
SETOUT
F1:OCC&BS
F2:SETOUT ROAD
F3:SELECT A FILE
3 Press the {F3} key.
{F3}
SELECT A FILE
FN:__________
INPUT LIST --- ENTER
4 Enter the name of the file being used (or select it
from the list).
5 Press the {ENT} key.
Select a file
{ENT}
6.6.8 Initialize ROAD data
To initialize the data, carry out the following operating procedure.
Operating procedure
Operation
1 After pressing the {MENU} key, press the {F4} (P↓),
{F2}, {F4}key to get the programs menu on page 2/
2.
2 Press the {F3}, {F3} key.
(Refer to “Initialize ROAD data” on page 6-26.)
{MENU}
{F4}
{F2}
{F4}
{F3}
{F3}
Display
PROGRAMS
2/2
F1:AREA
F2:POINT TO LINE
F3:ROAD
P↓
INITIALIZE DATA
ERASE ROAD DATA
>OK ?
3 When the {F4} (YES) key is pressed, all ROAD
DATA with the exception of the coordinate data file
is erased.
{F4}
Press the {F4} key.
6-36
[NO][YES]
7 DATA COLLECTION
7
DATA COLLECTION
The ES is able to store the measured data into the internal memory.
The internal memory is shared by the measured data files and the coordinate data files.
 Measured data
The collected data is memorized into a files.
 The number of measurement points
(In case not using the internal memory in layout mode)
MAX. 10,000 points
Because the internal memory covers both data collection mode and layout mode, the number of
measurement points will be decreased when the layout mode is used.
For the internal memory, refer to Chapter 9 “MEMORY MANAGER MODE”.

•
•
When turning off the power, ensure that you are in the main menu screen or main angle
measurement mode.
This ensures completion of the memory access process and avoids possible damage to the stored
data.
It is recommended for safety to charge the battery beforehand and prepare fully charged spare
batteries.
7-1
7 DATA COLLECTION
 Data collect menu operation
By pressing the {MENU} key, the instrument will be in MENU 1/3 mode.
Press the {F2} (DATA COLLECT) key, the menu of data collect 1/2 will be shown.
Normal measurement mode
{ESC}
{MENU}
MENU
1/4
F1:TOP FIELD
F2:DATA COLLECT
F3:LAYOUT
P↓
{F2}
SELECT A FILE
FN:
Selecting data collection file
INPUT LIST ––– ENTER
Set file
DATA COLLECT
1/2
F1:OCC.PT# INPUT
F2:BACKSIGHT
F3:FS/SS
P↓
{ESC}
{F1}
OCC.PT# INPUT
DATA COLLECTION MENU 1/2
{F2}
Setting occupied point
See Section 7.1.3 “Occupied Point and
Backsight Point”.
BACKSIGHT
{F4}
{F3}
Setting direction angle
See Section 7.1.3 “Occupied Point and
Backsight Point”.
FS/SS
DATA COLLECT
2/2
F1:SELECT A FILE
F2:PCODE INPUT
F3:CONFIG.
P↓
DATA COLLECTION MENU 2/2
Executing data collection
See section 7.2 “Operational Procedure of
DATA COLLECT”
{ESC}
{F1}
SELECT A FILE
{F2}
File can be selected for Data collect.
See Section 7.1.1 “Selecting a File for
Data Collection”.
PCODE INPUT
{F3}
Editing PCODE library
See Section 7.6 “Editing PCODE Library
[PCODE INPUT]”
CONFIG
Setting Parameter of Data Collect
See Section 7.7 “Setting Parameter of
Data Collect [CONFIG.]”.
7-2
7 DATA COLLECTION
7.1 Preparation
7.1.1 Selecting a File for Data Collection
A file used by data collection mode must be selected at first.
Select a file before beginning data collection mode because selection screen of a file is displayed. And
a selection from data collection menu is possible in the mode.
Operating procedure
Operation
Display
MENU
1/3
F1:TOP FIELD
F2:DATA COLLECT
F3:LAYOUT
P↓
1 Press {F2} (DATA COLLECT) key from menu 1/3.
{F2}
SELECT A FILE
FN:_________
INPUT LIST ––– ENTER
2 Press {F2} (LIST) key to display the list of file. *1)
3 Scroll file list by pressing {
} or {
} key and
{F2}
{
select a file to use. *2),3)
4 Press {F4} (ENTER) key.
The file will be set and data collect 1/2 menu will
be shown.
} or {
AMIDATA
/M0123
→*HILDATA
/M0345
TOPDATA
/M0789
––– SRCH ––– ENTER
}
{F4}
TOPDATA
/M0789
→RAPDATA
/M0564
SATDATA
/M0456
––– SRCH ––– ENTER
DATA COLLECT
1/2
F1:OCC.PT# INPUT
F2:BACKSIGHT
F3:FS/SS
P↓
*1) If you want to make a new file or input file name directly, press {F1} (INPUT) key and enter a file name.
*2) When a file has been selected already, '*' mark is indicated on left of current file name.
*3) Data in a file shown with arrow can be searched by pressing {F2} (SRCH) key.

•
It is possible to select a file from DATA COLLECT 2/2 menu in the
same way.
7-3
DATA COLLECT
2/2
F1:SELECT A FILE
F2:PCODE INPUT
F3:CONFIG.
P↓
7 DATA COLLECTION
7.1.2 Selecting a Coordinate File for Data Collection
When coordinate data in a coordinate data file are used for occupied point or backsight point, select a
coordinate file from the data collect menu 2/2 beforehand.
Operating procedure
Operation
Display
DATA COLLECT
2/2
F1:SELECT A FILE
F2:PCODE INPUT
F3:CONFIG.
P↓
1 Press the {F1} (SELECT A FILE) key from DATA
COLLECT menu 2/2.
2 Press the {F2} (COORD.DATA) key.
{F1}
{F2}
SELECT A FILE
F1:MEAS.DATA
F2:COORD.DATA
SELECT A FILE
FN:
INPUT LIST --- ENTER
3 Select a coordinate file in the same manner as
Section 7.1.1 “Selecting a File for Data Collection”.
7-4
7 DATA COLLECTION
7.1.3 Occupied Point and Backsight Point
The occupied point and direction angle in the data collect mode are linked with the occupied point and
direction angle in normal coordinate measurement.
It is possible to set or change the occupied point and direction angle from the data collect mode.
Occupied point can be set by two setting methods as follow.
• Setting from the coordinate data stored in the internal memory.
• Direct key input.
The following three setting methods for backsight point can be selected.
• Setting from the coordinate data stored in the internal memory.
• Direct key input of coordinate data.
• Direct key input of setting angle.
 See 9.4 “Coordinate Data Direct Key Input” and 9.7.2 “Loading Data” for how to store coordinate
into the internal memory.
 Example for setting the occupied point:
In case of setting occupied point from the coordinate data stored in the internal memory.
Operating procedure
1 Press the {F1} (OCC.PT# INPUT) key from the
data collect menu 1/2.
The previous data is shown.
2 Press the {F4} (OCNEZ) key.
Operation
Display
{F1}
PT#
→ PT-01
ID
:
INS.HT:
0.000 m
INPUT SRCH REC OCNEZ
{F4}
OCC.PT
PT#:PT-01
INPUT LIST NEZ ENTER
3 Press the {F1} (INPUT) key and enter PT#.*1)
{F1}
Enter PT#
{F4}
Press the {F4} (ENT) key.
4 Press the {F3} (YES) key.
5 Enter ID, INS.HT in the same way. *2),3)
PT#
→ PT-11
ID
:
INS.HT:
0.000 m
INPUT SRCH REC OCNEZ
Enter ID,
INS.HT
PT#
:PT-11
ID
:
INS.HT→
1.335 m
INPUT SRCH REC OCNEZ
>REC ?
[YES][NO]
{F3}
7 Press {F3} (YES) key.
{F3}
DATA COLLECT
1/2
F1:OCC.PT# INPUT
F2:BACKSIGHT
F3:FS/SS
P↓
*1) Refer to Section 2.4 “How to Enter Alphanumeric Characters”.
*2) ID can be input by inputting a register number linked with PCODE Library.
To show the list of PCODE library, press the {F2} (SRCH) key.
*3) Press the {F3} (REC) key when you do not input the INS.HT.

•
•
The data recorded in data collect is PT#, ID and INS.HT.
If point is not found in internal memory "PT# DOES NOT EXIST" is displayed.
7-5
0.000m
0.000m
0.000m
[YES] [NO]
{F3}
6 Press {F3} (REC) key.
The display returns to the data collect menu 1/2.
N:
E:
Z:
>OK?
7 DATA COLLECTION
 Example for setting the direction angle:
The following is to memorize the data of the backsight after setting the backsight point from point
number.
Operating procedure
Operation
1 Press the {F2} (BACKSIGHT) key from the data
collect menu 1/2.
The previous data is shown.
2 Press the {F4} (BS) key. *1)
Display
→
:
:
0.000 m
0SET MEAS BS
{F2}
BS#
PCODE
R.HT
INPUT
{F4}
BACKSIGHT
PT#:
INPUT LIST NE/AZ ENT
3 Press the {F1} (INPUT) key and enter PT#. *2)
{F1}
Enter PT#
{F4}
4 Press the {F3} (YES) key.
6 Collimate back sight point.
Select one of the measuring mode and press the
soft key.
EXAMPLE: {F2} (Slope Distance) key.
Horizontal circle is set to calculated direction
angle. Measuring starts.
Measuring result is memorized and the display
returns to the data collect menu 1/2.
0.000m
0.000m
0.000m
[YES] [NO]
{F3}
BS#
PCODE
R.HT
INPUT
→ PT-22
:
:
0.000 m
0SET MEAS BS
{F3}
BS#
PCODE
R.HT
*VH
→ PT-22
:
:
0.000 m
SD NEZ NP/P
Enter PCODE,R.HT in the same way. *3),4)
5 Press the {F3} (MEAS) key.
N:
E:
Z:
>OK?
Collimate
BS
{F2}
V :
90°00'00"
HR:
0°00'00"
SD*[n]
<<< m
> Measuring...
DATA COLLECT
1/2
F1:OCC.PT# INPUT
F2:BACKSIGHT
F3:FS/SS
P↓
*1) Pressing each time the {F3} key, the input method changes as Coordinate value, Angle, Coordinate
point name alternatively.
*2) Refer to Chapter 2.4 “How to Enter Alphanumeric Characters”.
*3) PCODE can be input by inputting a register number linked with PCODE Library.
To show the list of PCODE library, press the {F2} (SRCH) key.
*4) Data collect sequence can be set to [MEAS→ EDIT]. Refer to Section 7.7 “Setting Parameter of
Data Collect [CONFIG.]”.

•
If point is not found in internal memory " PT# DOES NOT EXIST" is displayed.
7-6
7 DATA COLLECTION
7.2 Operational Procedure of DATA COLLECT
Operating procedure
Operation
Display
DATA COLLECT
1/2
F1:OCC.PT# INPUT
F2:BACKSIGHT
F3:FS/SS
P↓
1 Press the {F3} (FS/SS) key from the data collect
menu 1/2.
The previous data is shown.
2 Press the {F1} (INPUT) key and enter PT#.
{F3}
{F1}
Enter PT#
{F4}
Press the {F4} (ENT) key. *1)
PT#
PCODE
R.HT
INPUT
PT#
=PT-01
PCODE :
R.HT :
0.000 m
[ALP][SPC][CLR][ENT]
PT#
PCODE
R.HT
INPUT
3 Enter PCODE, R.HT in the same way. *2),3)
{F1}
Enter
PCODE
{F4}
{F1}
EnterR.HT
{F4}
{F3}
4 Press the {F3} (MEAS) key.
5 Collimate the target point.
→
:
:
0.000 m
SRCH MEAS ALL
:PT-01
→
:
0.000 m
SRCH MEAS ALL
PT#
→ PT-01
PCODE :TOPCON
R.HT :
1.200 m
INPUT SRCH MEAS ALL
VH *SD
NEZ
P1↓
Collimate
6 Press one of the {F1} to {F3} key. *4)
{F2}
Example: {F2} (SD) key.
Measuring starts.
The measuring data is memorized and the display
changes to the next point. *5)
PT# is automatically incremented.
7 Enter the next point data and collimate the next
V : 90°10'20"
HR: 120°30'40"
SD*[n]
< m
> Measuring...
< complete >
PT#
PCODE
R.HT
INPUT
→ PT-02
:TOPCON
:
1.200 m
SRCH MEAS ALL
Collimate
point.
8 Press {F4} (ALL) key.
Measuring starts in the same measuring mode of
the previous point.
Data is recorded.
{F4}
V : 90°10'20"
HR: 120°30'40"
SD*[n]
< m
> Measuring...
< complete >
PT#
PCODE
R.HT
INPUT
Continue the measuring in the same way.
To finish the mode, press {ESC} key.
7-7
→ PT-03
:TOPCON
:
1.200 m
SRCH MEAS ALL
7 DATA COLLECTION
*1) Refer to Section 2.4 “How to Enter Alphanumeric Characters”.
*2) PCODE can be input by inputting a register number linked with PCODE Library.
To show the list of PCODE library, press the {F2} (SRCH) key.
*3) Data collect sequence can be set to [MEAS→ EDIT]. See to Section 7.7 “Setting Parameter of Data
Collect [CONFIG.]”.
*4) The mark "*" indicates the previous measuring mode.
*5) You can confirm the measured data as follows. Refer to Section 7.7 “Setting Parameter of Data
Collect [CONFIG.]”.
V : 90°10'20"
HR: 120°30'40"
SD:
98.765 m
> OK ?
[YES][NO]
7.2.1 Searching the recorded data
While executing the DATA COLLECT mode, you can search the recorded data.
Operating procedure
Operation
Display
PT#
PCODE
R.HT
INPUT
1 While executing the DATA COLLECT mode,
{F2}
press {F2} (SRCH) key. *1)
The using file name will appear on the top of the
right side of the display.
2 Select one of three search methods by pressing
{F1} to {F3} key. *2)
→ PT-02
:
: 1.200 m
SRCH MEAS ALL
SEARCH
[TOPCON]
F1:FIRST DATA
F2:LAST DATA
F3:PT# DATA
{F1} to {F3}
*1) It is possible to see the PCODE list when the arrow is located beside PCODE or ID.
*2) The operation is same as the "SEARCH" in the MEMORY MANAGER mode.
For more information, refer to Section 9.2 “Searching Data”.
7.2.2 Entering PCODE / ID using PCODE Library
While executing the DATA COLLECT mode, you can enter PCODE /ID from PCODE Library.
Operating procedure
Operation
Display
PT#
PCODE
R.HT
INPUT
1 Move the arrow to the PCODE or ID in the DATA
COLLECT mode, press the {F1} (INPUT) key.
2 Enter a register number linked with PCODE library
and press the {F4} (ENT) key.
(Example)
Register number, 32 = TOPCON
7-8
{F1}
Enter No
{F4}
:PT-02
→
: 1.200 m
SRCH MEAS ALL
PT#
:PT-02
PCODE =32
R.HT : 1.200 m
[ALP][SPC][CLR][ENT]
PT#
PCODE
R.HT
INPUT
:PT-02
:TOPCON
→ 1.200 m
SRCH MEAS ALL
7 DATA COLLECTION
7.2.3 Entering PCODE / ID from the list of PCODE
You can also enter PCODE / ID from the list of PCODE.
Operating procedure
Operation
Display
PT#
PCODE
R.HT
INPUT
1 Move the arrow to the PCODE or ID in the DATA
{F2}
COLLECT mode, press the {F2} (SRCH) key.
2 By pressing the following keys, the register
number will increase or decrease.
{ } or { }: Increasing or Decreasing one by one
{ } or { }: By ten Increasing or Decreasing. *1)
3 Press the {F4} (ENTER) key.
{
{
} or {
} or {
{F4}
:PT-02
→
: 1.200 m
SRCH MEAS ALL
→ 001:PCODE01
002:PCODE02
EDIT ––– CLR ENTER
}
}
031:PCODE31
→ 032:TOPCON
033:HILTOP
EDIT ––– CLR ENTER
PT#
PCODE
R.HT
INPUT
:PT-02
:TOPCON
→ 1.200 m
SRCH MEAS ALL
*1) To edit the PCODE library, press the {F1} (EDIT) key.
To delete the PCODE registered with shown an arrow, press the {F3} (CLR) key.

•
PCODE can be edited in DATA COLLECT menu 2/2 or MEMORY MANAGER menu 2/3.
7-9
7 DATA COLLECTION
7.3 Data Collect Offset Measurement mode
This mode is useful when it is difficult to set up the prism directly, for example at the center of a tree.
Data Collect. Offset Measurement has two measuring methods.
• Angle offset measurement
• Distance offset measurement
• Plane offset measurement
• Column offset measurement
7.3.1 Angle Offset Measurement
Place the prism at the same horizontal distance from the instrument as that of point A0 to measure.
When measuring coordinates of ground point A1:Set the
instrument height / prism height.
When measuring coordinates of point A0: Set the instrument
height only. (Set the prism height to 0).
Prism P
When sighting to A0, you can select one of two
ways. One is to fix vertical angle to the prism
position even up down the telescope position, and
the other is to gear vertical angle to the up down
of telescope movement. In case following the
vertical angle to the movement of telescope, SD
(Slope Distance) and VD (Vertical Distance) will
be changed according to the movement of
telescope.
To set this option, refer to Chapter 17
“SELECTING MODE”.
Prism height
Instrument height
Occ.Point
Operating procedure
Operation
Display
PT#
PCODE
R.HT
INPUT
→PT-11
:TOPCON
:
1.200 m
SRCH MEAS ALL
{F3}
{F4}
PT#
PCODE
R.HT
VH
OFSET
→PT-11
:TOPCON
:
1.200 m
*SD
NEZ P1↓
PTL
NP/P P2↓
2 Press the {F1} (OFSET) key.
{F1}
OFFSET
1/2
F1:ANG. OFFSET
F2:DIST. OFFSET
F3:PLANE OFFSET P↓
3 Press the {F1} (ANG.OFFSET) key.
{F1}
OFFSET-MEASUREMENT
HR: 120°30'40"
HD:
m
MEAS --- NP/P ---
1 Press the {F3} (MEAS) key and press the {F4}key
to get to the next soft key page.
4 Collimate the prism.
Collimate P
7-10
7 DATA COLLECTION
5 Press the {F1} (MEAS) key.
{F1}
Continuous measuring starts.
OFFSET-MEASUREMENT
HR: 120°30'40"
HD*[n]
< m
>measuring ...
OFFSET-MEASUREMENT
HR: 120°30'40"
SD*
12.345 m
>OK?
[YES][NO]
6 Collimate point A0 using the horizontal motion
Collimate
A0
clamp and horizontal tangent screw.
7 Show the horizontal distance of point A0.
8 Show the relative elevation of point A0.
•
•
{
}
OFFSET-MEASUREMENT
HR: 123°30'40"
HD:
6.543 m
>OK?
[YES][NO]
{
}
OFFSET-MEASUREMENT
HR: 123°30'40"
VD:
0.843 m
>OK?
[YES][NO]
{
}
OFFSET-MEASUREMENT
HR: 123°30'40"
N :
–12.345 m
>OK?
[YES][NO]
Each time pressing {
} key, horizontal distance,
relative elevation and slope distance are shown in
sequence.
9 Show N coordinate of point A0 or A1.
Each time pressing {
} key, N,E and Z
coordinate are shown in sequence.
10 Press the {F3} (YES) key.
{F3}
The data is recorded and the next measuring point
is displayed.
7-11
OFFSET-MEASUREMENT
HR: 123°30'40"
SD:
12.345 m
>OK?
[YES][NO]
PT#
PCODE
R.HT
INPUT
→ PT-12
:TOPCON
:
1.200 m
SRCH MEAS ALL
7 DATA COLLECTION
7.3.2 Distance Offset Measurement
The measurement of a place apart from a prism is possible by inputting offset horizontal distance of
front and back / right and left.
Forward HD
oHD sign
A0
RorL HD
A1
Prism height
Prism P
Instrument height
Occ.Point
When measuring coordinates of ground point A1:
Set the instrument height / prism height.
When measuring coordinates of point A0:
Set the instrument height only.
(Set the prism height to 0).
Operating procedure
Operation
Display
PT#
PCODE
R.HT
INPUT
→PT-11
:TOPCON
:
1.200 m
SRCH MEAS ALL
{F3}
{F4}
PT#
PCODE
R.HT
VH
OFSET
→PT-11
:TOPCON
:
1.200 m
*SD
NEZ P1↓
PTL
NP/P P2↓
2 Press the {F1} (OFSET) key.
{F1}
OFFSET
1/2
F1:ANG. OFFSET
F2:DIST. OFFSET
F3:PLANE OFFSET P↓
3 Press the {F2} (DIST.OFFSET) key.
{F2}
DISTANCE OFFSET
INPUT RorL HD
oHD=0.000 m
--- --- [CLR] [ENT]
Enter HD
{F4}
DISTANCE OFFSET
INPUT FORWARD HD
oHD=0.000 m
--- --- [CLR] [ENT]
1 Press the {F3} (MEAS) key and press the {F4}key
to get to the next soft key page.
4 Enter Right and Left direction offset value.*1)
7-12
7 DATA COLLECTION
5 Enter Forward direction offset value. *1)
Enter HD
{F4}
6 Collimate the prism.
PT#
:PT-11
PCODE : TOPCON
R.HT :
1.200 m
––– *SD NEZ NP/P
Collimate P
7 Press the {F2} or {F3} key.
{F3}
Example:{F3} (NEZ) key
Measuring starts.
The data is recorded and the next measuring point
is displayed.
*1) To skip entering, press the {F3} (SKP) key.
7-13
N*[n]
<<< m
E :
m
Z :
m
>measuring ...
>Calculating...
PT#
PCODE
R.HT
INPUT
→ PT-12
:TOPCON
: 1.200 m
SRCH MEAS ALL
7 DATA COLLECTION
7.3.3 Plane Offset Measurement
Measuring will be taken for the place where direct measuring can not be done, for example distance or
coordinate measuring for a edge of a plane.
Three random points (P1, P2, P3) on a plane will be measured at first in the plane offset measurement
to determine the measured plane. Collimate the measuring point (P0) then the instrument calculates
and displays coordinate and distance value of cross point between collimation axis and of the plane.
P
Edge
P
P2
P3
Target heights of P1 to P3 is set to zero automatically.
Operating procedure
Operation
Display
PT#
PCODE
R.HT
INPUT
→PT-11
:TOPCON
:
1.200 m
SRCH MEAS ALL
{F3}
{F4}
PT#
PCODE
R.HT
VH
OFSET
→PT-11
:TOPCON
:
1.200 m
*SD
NEZ P1↓
PTL
NP/P P2↓
2 Press the {F1} (OFSET) key.
{F1}
OFFSET
1/2
F1:ANG. OFFSET
F2:DIST. OFFSET
F3:PLANE OFFSET P↓
3 Press the {F3} (PLANE OFFSET) key.
{F3}
PLANE
N001#:
SD:
MEAS ---
1 Press the {F3} (MEAS) key and press the {F4}key
to get to the next soft key page.
4 Collimate prism P1, and press the {F1} (MEAS)
key.
Measuring will start.
After measuring, the display will show the second
point measurement.
7-14
Collimate
P1
{F1}
m
NP/P ---
PLANE
N001#:
SD* [n]
<< m
>Measuring...
7 DATA COLLECTION
5 Measure the second and third points in the same
way. *1)
Collimate
P2
{F1}
PLANE
N002#:
SD:
MEAS ---
m
NP/P ---
Collimate
P3
{F1}
PLANE
N003#:
SD:
MEAS ---
m
NP/P ---
The display changes to PT# input in the plane
offset measurement.
Input point number if necessary.
PLANE
PT#
→ PT-11
PCODE :TOPCON
INPUT SRCH --- MEAS
6 Press the {F4} (MEAS) key.
The instrument calculates and displays coordinate
and distance value of cross point between
collimation axis and of the plane. *2)
7 Collimate the edge (P0) of the plane. *3), 4)
{F4}
HR:
HD:
VD:
>OK?
80°30'40"
54.321 m
10.000 m
[YES][NO]
Collimate
P0
HR:
HD:
VD:
>OK?
75°30'40"
54.600 m
-0.487 m
[YES][NO]
V :
HR:
SD:
>OK?
90°30'40"
75°30'40"
54.602 m
[YES][NO]
8 To show the slope distance (SD), press the {
•
•
}
key.
Each time pressing the {
} key, horizontal
distance, relative elevation and slope distance are
shown in sequence.
To show coordinate value of point P0, press the
{
} key.
9 Press the {F3} (YES) key. Next offset point
{F3}
number will be displayed.
10 To escape the measuring, press the {ESC} key.
The display returns to the next point number in
data collect mode.
{ESC}
PLANE
PT#
→ PT-12
PCODE :TOPCON
INPUT SRCH --- MEAS
PT#
PCODE
R.HT
INPUT
→ PT-12
:TOPCON
:
1.200 m
SRCH MEAS ALL
*1) In case the calculation of plane was not successful by the measured three points, error displays. Start
measuring over again from the first point.
*2) Data display is the mode beforehand of offset measurement mode.
*3) Error will be displayed when collimated to the direction which does not cross with the determined plane.
*4) The reflector height of the target point P0 is set to zero automatically
7-15
7 DATA COLLECTION
7.3.4 Column Offset Measurement
If it is possible to measure circumscription point (P1) of column directly, the distance to the center of the
column (P0), coordinate and direction angle can be calculated by measured circumscription points (P2)
and (P3).
The direction angle of the center of the column is 1/2 of total direction angle of circumscription points
(P2) and (P3).
P
P2
P3
P
Example: Non-prism measurement
Operating procedure
Operation
Display
PT#
PCODE
R.HT
INPUT
→PT-11
N
:TOPCON
P
:
1.200 m
SRCH MEAS ALL
{F3}
{F4}
PT#
PCODE
R.HT
VH
OFSET
→PT-11
N
:TOPCON
P
:
1.200 m
*SD
NEZ P1↓
PTL
NP/P P2↓
2 Press the {F1} (OFSET) key.
{F1}
OFFSET
1/2
N
F1:ANG. OFFSET
P
F2:DIST. OFFSET
F3:PLANE OFFSET P↓
3 Press the {F4} (P1↓) key.
{F4}
OFFSET
2/2
F1:COLUMN OFFSET NP
1 Press the {F3} (MEAS) key and press the {F4}key
to get to the next soft key page.
P↓
4 Press the {F1} (COLUMN OFFSET) key.
{F1}
5 Collimate the center of the column (P1) and press
the {F1} (MEAS) key.
Measuring will start.
After the measurement, angle measuring display
of the left side (P2) will be shown.
7-16
Collimate
P1
{F1}
COLUMN OFFSET
N
Center
P
HD:
m
MEAS --- NP/P --COLUMN OFFSET
Center
HD* [n]
<< m
>Measuring...
N
P
7 DATA COLLECTION
6 Collimate the left side of the column (P2) and
press the {F4} (SET) key.
After the measurement, angle measuring display
of the right side (P3) will be shown.
7 Collimate the right side of the column (P3) and
press the {F4} (SET) key.
Collimate
P2
{F4}
COLUMN OFFSET
N
Left
P
HR: 120°30'40"
--- --- --- SET
Collimate
P3
{F4}
COLUMN OFFSET
N
Right
P
HR: 180°30'40"
--- --- --- SET
The distance between the instrument and center
of the column (P0) will be calculated.
To show the relative elevation (VD), press the
{
} key.
Each time pressing the {
} key, horizontal
distance, relative elevation and slope distance are
shown in sequence.
To show coordinate of point P0, press the {
}
key.
8 Press the {F3} (YES) key. The display returns to
the next point number in data collect mode.
COLUMN OFFSET
HR: 150°30'40" NP
HD:
43.321 m
>OK?
[YES][NO]
{
}
{F3}
COLUMN OFFSET
HR: 150°30'40" NP
VD:
2.321 m
>OK?
[YES][NO]
PT#
PCODE
R.HT
INPUT
→ PT-12
N
:TOPCON
P
:
1.200 m
SRCH MEAS ALL
7.4 NEZ Auto Calculation
As measured data is collected, coordinates are calculated and stored for traverse or topo collection.
Automatic making out function of coordinate data sets up in CONFIG of data collect.
Refer to Section 7.7 “Setting Parameter of Data Collect [CONFIG.]”.
As a default, coordinate data calculated will be saved in a file of the same name as the measurement
data file.
When the coordinate data file of the same name as the measurement data file does not exist, it will be
generated automatically.
It is possible to change a file for saving coordinate data in the DATA COLLECT Menu 2/2 (F1:SELECT
A FILE).
To calculate a coordinate data, it is necessary to add a point number in Data Collect execution.
When a coordinate data of the same point number exist already, it can be replaced with the new data by
confirming display.

•
Coordinates will be calculated using the grid factor.
To set the grid factor, see Section 6.2 “Setting the GRID FACTOR”.
7-17
7 DATA COLLECTION
7.5 Point to Line Measurement
In this mode, a offsetting point from a certain determined line can be measured.
N
Ref.P2
Line
ΔO
Ref.P1
PT#
(PT#PTL)
ΔL
OCC.PT
Offset
E
7.5.1 To change to the point to line measurement
Operating procedure
Operation
Display
PT#
PCODE
R.HT
INPUT
→PT-01
:TOPCON
:
1.500 m
SRCH MEAS ALL
{F3}
{F4}
PT#
PCODE
R.HT
VH
OFSET
→PT-01
:TOPCON
:
1.500 m
*SD
NEZ P1↓
PTL NP/P P2↓
2 Press the {F2} (PTL) key.
{F2}
POINT TO LINE MODE
[F1:ON
]
F2:OFF
ENTER
3 Press the {F1} (ON) key and press the {F4}
{F4}
REF. POINT 1
PT#:
1 Press the {F3} (MEAS) key and press the {F4}key
to get to the next soft key page.
(ENTER) key.
The input screen of a reference point 1 will appear.
INPUT LIST --- ENTER
4 Enter the point 1 data and press the {F4} (Enter).
The input screen of a reference point 2 will appear.
Input data
{F4}
REF. POINT 2
PT#:
INPUT LIST --- ENTER
5 Enter the point 2 data and press the {F4} (Enter).
The screen will return to data collect
measurement.
If the PTL measurement mode is available, ‘PTL’
will appear next to PT#.
7-18
Input data
{F4}
PT#PTL→ PT-01
PCODE :TOPCON
R.HT :
1.500 m
INPUT SRCH MEAS ALL
7 DATA COLLECTION
7.5.2 Executing a point to line measurement
Operating procedure
Operation
Display
PT#PTL→PT-01
PCODE :TOPCON
R.HT :
1.500 m
INPUT SRCH MEAS ALL
Conduct data measurement according to the same
procedure as with ordinary FS/SS (ALL can also be
selected). However, when you conduct observation in
the angle mode, PTL data will not be displayed (only
the raw data will be recorded, upon which the
operation will end).
1 Press the {F3} (MEAS) key.
{F3}
PT#PTL→PT-01
PCODE :TOPCON
R.HT :
1.500 m
VH
*SD
NEZ P1↓
2 Press the {F2} (SD) key.
{F2}
V : 90°10'20"
HR: 120°30'40"
SD*
< m
> Measuring...
{F3}
L:
O:
E:
>REC?
If the PTL mode is on, then, after the coordinate
data is calculated, the PTL data will be displayed
regardless of the coordinate check setting, etc.
3 PTL measurement data will display.
Confirm the data and press {F3} (YES) key.
The recorded data are measured data and
coordinate data generated at the same time as a
PTL data.
44.789 m
33.456 m
2.321 m
[YES][NO]
PT#PTL→ PT-02
PCODE :TOPCON
R.HT :
1.500 m
INPUT SRCH MEAS ALL
•
In the PTL measurement mode, NEZ Auto Calculation will be turned on compulsorily and the coordinate
data will be stored into a coordinate file.
7-19
7 DATA COLLECTION
7.6 Editing PCODE Library [PCODE INPUT]
PCODE data can be entered into PCODE Library in this mode.
A PCODE is liked with a number of 1 to 50.
PCODE can be also edited in MEMORY MANAGER menu 2/3 in the same way.
Operating procedure
Operation
Display
DATA COLLECT
2/2
F1:SELECT A FILE
F2:PCODE INPUT
F3:CONFIG.
P↓
1 Press the {F2} (PCODE INPUT) key from Data
{F2}
Collect menu 2/2.
2 By pressing the following keys, the list will
increase or decrease.
{ } or { }: Increasing or Decreasing one by one.
{ } or { }: By ten Increasing or Decreasing.
3 Press the {F1} (EDIT) key.
{
{
} or {
} or {
}
}
{F1}
4 Enter PCODE and press the {F4} (ENT) key. *1)
Enter
PCODE
{F4}
*1) Refer to Section 2.4 “How to Enter Alphanumeric Characters”.
7-20
→ 001:TOPCON
002:TOKYO
EDIT –––
CLR
–––
011:URAH
→ 012:AMIDAT
013:HILLTO
EDIT –––
CLR
–––
011:URAH
→ 012=AMIDAT
013:HILLTO
[ALP][SPC][CLR][ENT]
011:URAH
→ 012:AMISUN
013:HILLTO
EDIT –––
CLR
–––
7 DATA COLLECTION
7.7 Setting Parameter of Data Collect [CONFIG.]
In this mode, the following settings of data collect mode are possible.
 Setting Items
Menu
Selecting Item
FINE / CRS(1) /
CRS(10)
F1:DIST MODE
F2:HD/SD
HD/SD
F3:MEAS. SEQ.
N-TIMES /
SINGLE / REPEAT
F1:DATA CONFIRM
F2:COLLECT SEQ.
YES/NO
[EDIT→MEAS] /
[MEAS→EDIT]
F3:NEZ AUTO. CALC
ON/OFF
Contents
Select Fine /Coarse(1) /Coarse(10) mode in distance
measurement mode.
The unit to be displayed is as follows.
Fine mode: 1mm (0.2mm)
Coarse (1) mode: 1mm
Coarse (10) mode: 10mm
Select the distance measurement mode Horizontal
Distance or Slope distance.
Select to set measurement mode for distance
measurement.
It is possible to confirm the result of measuring data
before the data is recorded.
Select the procedure of data collection.
[EDIT→MEAS]: Measurement is carried out after
entering other data.
[MEAS→EDIT]: Measurement is carried out before
entering other data.
It is possible to calculate coordinate value of data collected
and store it into coordinate data file in every data collection.
 How to Set Items
Example Setting: DATA CONFIRM: YES
Operating procedure
Operation
Display
DATA COLLECT
2/2
F1:SELECT A FILE
F2:PCODE INPUT
F3:CONFIG.
P↓
1 Press the {F3} (CONFIG.) key from the data
{F3}
collect menu 2/2.
The CONFIG menu 1/2 is shown.
2 Press the {F4} (P↓) key to display the CONFIG
menu 2/2.
3 Press the {F1} (DATA CONFIRM) key.
[ ] indicates the current setting.
CONFIG.
F1:DIST MODE
F2:HD/SD
F3:MEAS. SEQ.
1/2
P↓
{F4}
CONFIG.
2/2
F1:DATA CONFIRM
F2:COLLECT SEQ.
F3:NEZ AUTO.CALC P↓
{F1}
DATA CONFIRM
F1:YES
[F2:NO ]
ENTER
4 Press the {F1} (YES) key.
{F1}
DATA CONFIRM
[F1:YES]
F2:NO
ENTER
5 Press the {F4} (ENTER) key.
{F4}
7-21
8 LAYOUT
8
LAYOUT
LAYOUT mode has two functions which are setting of layout points and setting new points using
coordinate data in the internal memory.
Also, if the coordinate data is not stored in the internal memory, this can be input from keyboard.
The coordinate data is loaded from PC to the internal memory via RS-232C.
 The coordinate data
The coordinate data is memorized into a file.
For the internal memory, refer to Chapter 9 “MEMORY MANAGER MODE”.
The ES is able to store the coordinate data into the internal memory.
The internal memory is shared by the measured data and the coordinate data for layout.
Maximum 30 files can be generated.
 The number of coordinate data
(In case not using the internal memory in the data collect mode)
MAX. 10,000 points
Because the internal memory covers both data collection mode and layout mode, the number of
coordinate data will be decreased when the data collection mode is used.

•
•
•
When turning off the power, ensure that you are in the main menu screen or main angle
measurement mode.
This ensures completion of the memory access process and avoids possible damage to the stored
data.
It is recommended for safety to charge the battery beforehand and prepare fully charged spare
batteries.
When recording new point data, remember to consider the amount of internal memory available.
8-1
8 LAYOUT

Layout menu operation
By pressing the {MENU} key, the instrument will be in MENU 1/4 mode.
Press the {F3} (LAYOUT) key, the menu of layout 1/2 will be shown.
Normal measurement mode
{ESC}
{MENU}
MENU
1/4
F1:TOP FIELD
F2:DATA COLLECT
F3:LAYOUT
P↓
{F3}
SELECT A FILE
FN:_________
INPUT LIST SKP ENTER
Selecting a file for LAYOUT
{F1} (INPUT) : Input a new file name.
{F2} (LIST)
: Seek for a file.
{F3} (SKP)
: If you do not want to create or reselect a file.
{F4} (ENTER) : To select display file.
{F3} / {F4}
LAYOUT
1/2
F1:OCC.PT INPUT
F2:BACKSIGHT
F3:LAYOUT
P↓
OCC.PT INPUT
{ESC}
{F1}
OCC.PT
PT#:__________
INPUT LIST NEZ ENTER
BACKSIGHT
LAYOUT MENU 1/2
{F2}
BACKSIGHT
PT#:__________
INPUT LIST NE/AZ ENT
DATA INPUT
{F4}
{F3}
LAYOUT
PT#:__________
INPUT LIST NEZ ENTER
SELECT A FILE
LAYOUT
2/2
F1:SELECT A FILE
F2:NEW POINT
F3:GRID FACTOR
P↓
{ESC}
{F1}
SELECT A FILE
FN:__________
INPUT LIST ––– ENTER
LAYOUT MENU 2/2
NEW POINT
{F2}
NEW POINT
F1:SIDE SHOT
F2:RESECTION
GRID FACTOR
{F3}
GRID FACTOR
=1.000000
>MODIFY? [YES][NO]
8-2
8 LAYOUT
8.1 Preparation
8.1.1 Setting the GRID FACTOR
 Calculation Formula
1) Elevation Factor
Elevation Factor =
R
R+ELEV.
R
: The average radius of the earth
ELEV. : The elevation above mean sea level
2) Scale Factor
Scale Factor : Scale Factor at the surveying station
3) Grid Factor
Grid Factor = Elevation Factor × Scale Factor
Distance Calculation
1) Grid Distance
HDg = HD × Grid Factor
HDg : Grid distance
HD : Ground distance
2) Ground Distance
HD =
HDg
Grid Factor
 How to Set Grid Factor
Operating procedure
Operation
Display
LAYOUT
2/2
F1:SELECT A FILE
F2:NEW POINT
F3:GRID FACTOR
P↓
1 Press the {F3} (GRID FACTOR) key from the
{F3}
Layout menu 2/2.
GRID FACTOR
=0.998843
>MODIFY? [YES][NO]
2 Press the {F3} (YES) key.
{F3}
3 Enter Elevation. *1) Press the {F4} (ENT) key.
4 Enter Scale Factor in the same way.
Enter ELEV.
{F4}
Enter Scale
{F4}
GRID FACTOR
ELEV.=1000 m
SCALE:0.999000
--- --- [CLR] [ENT]
GRID FACTOR
ELEV.:2000 m
SCALE=1.001000
--- --- [CLR] [ENT]
GRID FACTOR
=1.000686
Grid Factor is displayed for 1 to 2 second and
display returns to Layout menu 2/2.
*1) Refer to Section 2.4 “How to Enter Alphanumeric Characters”.
Input Range: Elevation
: –9,999 to 9,999 meter (–32,805 to 3,2805 ft, ft+in)
Scale Factor : 0.990000 to 1.010000
See section 8.1.1 “Setting the GRID FACTOR” for more information.
8-3
8 LAYOUT
8.1.2 Selecting Coordinate Data File
You can execute a Layout from selected coordinate data file, also you can record New point measured
data into the selected coordinate data file.
 The only coordinate data file existing can be selected and you can not make a new file in this mode.
For more information about File, refer to Chapter 9 “MEMORY MANAGER MODE”.
 When LAYOUT MODE is begun, a file can be selected in the same way.
Operating procedure
Operation
Display
LAYOUT
2/2
F1:SELECT A FILE
F2:NEW POINT
F3:GRID FACTOR P↓
1 Press the {F1} (SELECT A FILE) key from the
{F1}
Layout menu 2/2.
SELECT A FILE
FN:
INPUT LIST ––– ENTER
2 Press the {F2} (LIST) key to display the list of
{F2}
coordinate data file.*1)
3 Scroll file list by pressing the {
} or {
} key and
select a file to use. *2),3)
4 Press the {F4} (ENTER) key.
{
} or {
{F4}
The file will be set.
COORDDATA /C0123
→*TOKBDATA /C0345
TOPCDATA /C0789
––– SRCH ––– ENTER
}
*TOKBDATA
→ TOPCDATA
SATIDATA
––– SRCH
/C0345
/C0789
/C0456
––– ENTER
LAYOUT
2/2
F1:SELECT A FILE
F2:NEW POINT
F3:GRID FACTOR P↓
*1) If you want to input file name directly, press the {F1} (INPUT) key and enter a file name.
*2) When a file has been selected already, ‘*’ mark is indicated on left of current file name.
For the file discrimination mark (*, @, &), refer to Section 9.3 “File Maintenance”.
*3) Data in a file shown with arrow can be searched by pressing the {F2} (SRCH) key.
8-4
8 LAYOUT
8.1.3 Setting Occupied Point
Occupied point can be set by two setting methods as follow.
1) Setting from the coordinate data stored in the internal memory.
2) Direct key input of coordinate data.
 Example setting: Setting the occupied point from the internal coordinate data file
Operating procedure
Operation
1 Press the {F1} (OCC.PT INPUT) key from the
{F1}
Layout menu 1/2.
Display
OCC.PT
PT#:
INPUT LIST NEZ ENTER
2 Press the {F1} (INPUT) key and enter PT#. *1)
{F1}
Enter PT#
{F4}
Press the {F4} (ENT) key.
OCC.PT
PT#=PT-01
[ALP][SPC][CLR][ENT]
3 Enter INS.HT in the same way.
Enter
INS.HT
{F4}
The display returns to layout menu 1/2.
INSTRUMENT HEIGHT
INPUT
INS.HT=
0.000 m
--- --- [CLR] [ENT]
LAYOUT
1/2
F1:OCC.PT INPUT
F2:BACKSIGHT
F3:LAYOUT
P↓
*1) Refer to Section 2.4 “How to Enter Alphanumeric Characters”.
8-5
8 LAYOUT
 Example setting: Setting Instrument point coordinates directly
Operating procedure
Operation
1 Press the {F1} (OCC.PT INPUT) key from the
{F1}
Layout menu 1/2.
Display
OCC.PT
PT#:
INPUT LIST NEZ ENTER
2 Press the {F3} (NEZ) key.
{F3}
3 Press the {F1} (INPUT) key and enter
{F1}
Enter coord.
{F4}
coordinate value.
press the {F4} (ENT) key. *1)
N→
0.000 m
E:
0.000 m
Z:
0.000 m
INPUT --- PT# ENTER
COORD.DATA INPUT
PT#:
INPUT –––
4 Press the {F1} (INPUT) key and enter PT#.
Press the {F4} (ENT) key. *2)
5 Enter Instrument Height in the same way.
The display returns to layout menu 1/2.
––– ENTER
{F1}
Enter PT#
{F4}
INSTRUMENT HEIGHT
INPUT
INS.HT=0.000
m
--- --- [CLR] [ENT]
Enter
INS.HT
{F4}
LAYOUT
1/2
F1:OCC.PT INPUT
F2:BACKSIGHT
F3:LAYOUT
P↓
*1) Refer to Section 2.4 “How to Enter Alphanumeric Characters”.
*2) It is possible to record the coordinate value. Refer to Chapter 17 “SELECTING MODE”.
8-6
8 LAYOUT
8.1.4 Setting Backsight Point
The following three setting methods for Backsight point can be selected.
1) Setting from the coordinate data file stored in the internal memory.
2) Direct key input of coordinate data.
3) Direct key input of setting angle.
 Example setting: Setting the backsight point from the internal coordinate data file
Operating procedure
Operation
1 Press the {F2} (BACKSIGHT) key from the Layout
{F2}
menu 1/2.
Display
BACKSIGHT
PT#:
INPUT LIST NE/AZ ENT
2 Press the {F1} (INPUT) key.
{F1}
Enter PT#
{F4}
Enter PT#, press the {F4} (ENT) key. *1)
BACKSIGHT
PT#=BK-01
[ALP][SPC][CLR][ENT]
BACKSIGHT
H(B)=
0°00'00"
>Sight ?
3 Sight the backsight point and press the {F3} (YES)
key.
The display returns to the layout menu 1/2.
[YES][NO]
Sight BK
{F3}
*1) Refer to Section 2.6 "How to enter alphanumeric characters".
 With each pressing of {F3} key,
method of inputting backsight
is changed.
BACKSIGHT
PT#:
INPUT LIST NE/AZ ENT
{F3} (NE/AZ)
N →
E :
INPUT –––
m
m
AZ
ENTER
{F3} (AZ)
BACKSIGHT
HR:
INPUT ––– PT#
ENTER
{F3} (PT#)
8-7
8 LAYOUT
 Example setting: Setting the backsight point coordinates directly
Operating procedure
Operation
1 Press the {F2} (BACKSIGHT) key from the Layout
{F2}
menu 1/2.
The previous data is shown.
Display
BACKSIGHT
PT#:
INPUT LIST NE/AZ ENT
2 Press the {F3} (NE/AZ) key.
{F3}
N→
E:
INPUT –––
3 Press the {F1} (INPUT) key and enter coordinate
value.
Press the {F4} (ENT) key. *1), 2)
{F1}
Enter coord.
{F4}
Sight BK
5 Press the {F3} (YES) key.
{F3}
The display returns to the layout menu 1/2.
AZ
[YES][NO]
LAYOUT
1/2
F1:OCC.PT INPUT
F2:BACKSIGHT
F3:LAYOUT
P↓
*1) Refer to Section 2.4 “How to Enter Alphanumeric Characters”.
*2) It is possible to record the coordinate value. Refer to Chapter 17 “SELECTING MODE”.
8-8
ENTER
BACKSIGHT
H(B)=
0°00'00"
>Sight ?
4 Sight the backsight point.
m
m
8 LAYOUT
8.2 Executing a Layout
The following methods can be selected for executing a Layout:
1) Recalling points from internal memory by point number.
2) Direct key input of coordinate values.
Example setting: Recalling point from internal memory.
Operating procedure
Operation
Display
LAYOUT
1/2
F1:OCC.PT INPUT
F2:BACKSIGHT
F3:LAYOUT
P↓
1 Press the {F3} (LAYOUT) key from the layout
{F3}
menu 1/2.
LAYOUT
PT#:
INPUT LIST NEZ ENTER
2 Press the {F1} (INPUT) key, and enter PT#. *1)
Press the {F4} (ENT) key. *2)
3 Enter reflector height in the same way.
When the layout point is set, the instrument will
start layout calculation.
HR: Calculated horizontal angle of the layout point
HD: Calculated horizontal distance from the
instrument to the layout point
4 Collimate the prism, and press the {F1} (ANGLE)
key.
PT#: Layout point
HR: Measured (Actual) horizontal angle.
dHR: Horizontal angle to be turned to the layout
point = Actual horizontal angle - Calculated
horizontal angle.
Correct direction when dHR = 0°00'00"
5 Press the {F1} (DIST) key.
HD: Measuring (Actual) horizontal distance
dHD: Horizontal distance to be turned to the
layout point = Actual horizontal distance –
Calculated horizontal distance.
dZ: Vertical distance to be turned to the layout
point = Actual vertical distance – Calculated
vertical distance.
6 Press the {F1} (MODE) key.
{F1}
Enter PT#
{F4}
REFLECTOR HEIGHT
INPUT
R.HT =
0.000 m
--- --- [CLR] [ENT]
Enter R.HT
{F4}
CALCULATED
HR=
90°10'20"
HD=
123.456 m
ANGLE DIST ––– –––
Collimate P
{F1}
PT#: LP-100
HR:
6°20'40"
dHR:
23°40'20"
DIST –––
NEZ –––
{F1}
< m
m
m
NP/P NEXT
HD*
110.12 m
dHD:
–13.34 m
dZ:
–0.05 m
MODE NEZ NP/P NEXT
{F1}
The fine mode measuring starts.
HD*[t]
dHD:
dZ:
MODE NEZ
HD*[r]
dHD:
dZ:
MODE NEZ
< m
m
m
NP/P NEXT
HD*
120.129 m
dHD:
–3.327 m
dZ:
–0.046 m
MODE NEZ NP/P NEXT
8-9
8 LAYOUT
7 When the display value dHR, dHD and dZ are
equal to 0, the layout point is established.*3)
8 Press the {F2} (NEZ) key.
The coordinate data is shown.
9 Press the {F4} (NEXT) key to set next layout point.
PT# is automatically incremented.
{F2}
N *
100.000
E :
100.000
Z :
1.015
MODE ANGLE NP/P
{F4}
LAYOUT
PT#: LP-101
m
m
m
NEXT
INPUT LIST NEZ ENTER
*1) Refer to Section 2.4 “How to Enter Alphanumeric Characters”.
*2) Point number could not be entered when data to comply with the coordinate value does not exist in the
file.
*3) Cut & Fill displaying function is available. Refer to Chapter 17 “SELECTING MODE”.
8-10
8 LAYOUT
8.2.1 Layout of Coordinates of Point to Line
The coordinate data of point to line can be used during execution of layout.
When a point name including PTL coordinates (including ‘From’ and ‘To’ data) is specified, the mode
will change to PTL mode automatically.
There are two ways to enter the PTL coordinate data, Direct key input and Data transfer.
Refer to 9.4.2 “PTL (Point to Line) data input” and 9.7 “Data Communications”.
N
Line
To
Collimation point
From
ΔO
Layout point
ΔL
OCC.PT
Offset
Operating procedure
E
Operation
Display
LAYOUT
PT#: PT-21
INPUT LIST NEZ ENTER
1 Press the {F1} (INPUT) key, and enter PT#.
Press the {F4} (ENT) key.
2 Enter reflector height in the same way.
When the layout point is set, the instrument will
start layout calculation.
The {F3} (PTL) key will be assigned.
3 Collimate the prism, and press the {F1} (ANGLE)
key.
4 Press the {F1} (DIST) key.
HD: Measuring (Actual) horizontal distance
dHD: Horizontal distance to be turned to the
layout point = Actual horizontal distance –
Calculated horizontal distance.
dZ: Vertical distance to be turned to the layout
point = Actual vertical distance – Calculated
vertical distance.
5 Press the {F2} (PTL) key.
The difference between Collimation point and
Layout point distance on the coordinate system of
the line determined will be displayed.
8-11
{F1}
Enter PT#
{F4}
REFLECTOR HEIGHT
INPUT
R.HT =
1.500 m
--- --- [CLR] [ENT]
Enter R.HT
{F4}
CALCULATED
HR= 45°10'20"
HD=
1.500 m
ANGLE DIST PTL –––
Collimate P
{F1}
PT#: LP-100
HR:
45°00'00"
dHR:
0°00'00"
DIST –––
PTL –––
{F1}
HD*
143.84 m
dHD:
–13.34 m
dZ:
–0.05 m
MODE PTL NP/P NEXT
{F2}
dL:
dO:
dE:
MODE ANGLE
0.005 m
0.327 m
0.046 m
NP/P NEXT
8 LAYOUT
8.3 Setting a New Point
New point is required for example when a layout point cannot be sighted from existing control points.
8.3.1 Side Shot Method
Set up the instrument at a known point, and measure the coordinate of the new points by the side shot
method
N
Known Point B
New Point
Known Point A
(Instrument)
Operating procedure
Operation
Display
LAYOUT
1/2
F1:OCC.PT INPUT
F2:BACKSIGHT
F3:LAYOUT
P↓
1 Press the {F4} (↓) key from the layout menu 1/2 to
{F4}
LAYOUT
2/2
F1:SELECT A FILE
F2:NEW POINT
F3:GRID FACTOR P↓
2 Press the {F2} (NEW POINT).
{F2}
NEW POINT
F1:SIDE SHOT
F2:RESECTION
3 Press the {F1} (SIDE SHOT) key.
{F1}
SELECT A FILE
FN:_________
get the layout menu 2/2.
INPUT LIST ––––ENTER
4 Press the {F2} (LIST) key to display the list of
{F2}
coordinate data file. *1)
5 Scroll file list by pressing {
} or {
} key and
{
select a file to use. *2),3)
8-12
} or {
COORDDATA /C0123
→*TOKBDATA /C0345
TOPCDATA /C0789
––– SRCH ––– ENTER
}
*TOKBDATA
→ TOPCDATA
SATIDATA
––– SRCH
/C0345
/C0789
/C0456
––– ENTER
8 LAYOUT
6 Press the {F4} (ENTER) key.
{F4}
The file will be set.
SIDE SHOT
PT#:
INPUT SRCH ––– ENTER
7 Press the {F1} (INPUT) key, and enter the new
point name. *4)
Press the {F4} (ENT) key.
8 Enter reflector height in the same way.
9 Collimate the new point, and press the {F1}
{F1}
Enter PT#
{F4}
REFLECTOR HEIGHT
INPUT
R.HT =
0.000 m
--- --- [CLR] [ENT]
Enter R.HT
{F4}
REFLECTOR HEIGHT
INPUT
R.HT :
1.235 m
MEAS --- NP/P ---
Collimate
{F1}
(MEAS) key.
Distance measuring starts.
HR:
123°40'20"
HD*[n]
< m
VD:
m
> Measuring...
< complete >
N : 1234.567 m
E :
123.456 m
Z :
1.234 m
>REC ?
[YES][NO]
10 Press the {F3} (YES) key.*5)
The name and coordinate value are stored into
COORD.DATA.
The input menu for next new point is displayed.
PT# is automatically incremented.
{F3}
SIDE SHOT
PT#:NP-101
INPUT SRCH ––– ENTER
*1) If you want to input file name directly, press the {F1} (INPUT) key and enter a file name.
*2) When a file has been selected already, ‘*’ mark is indicated on left of current file name.
For the file discrimination mark (*, @, &), refer to Chapter 9.3 “File Maintenance”.
*3) Data in a file shown with arrow can be searched by pressing {F2} (SRCH) key.
*4) Refer to Section 2.4 “How to Enter Alphanumeric Characters”.
*5) An error will be displayed when the internal memory is full.
8-13
8 LAYOUT
8.3.2 Resection Method
Set up the instrument at a new point, and calculate the coordinate of the new point using the coordinate
data of maximum seven known points and the measurements made to these points.
By following observation, resection is possible.
• Resection by distance measurement: 2 or more points must be measured
• Resection by angle measurement only: 3 or more points must be measured
An occupied point coordinate value will be calculated by the method of least squares.
(In case that 3 known points are measured by angle measurement only, the value would not be
calculated by the method of least squares.)
Known Point A
New Point
(Instrument)
Max. 7 points
Known Point B
Known Point C
Operating procedure
Operation
Display
LAYOUT
1/2
F1:OCC.PT INPUT
F2:BACKSIGHT
F3:LAYOUT
P↓
1 Press the {F4} (↓) key from the layout menu 1/2 to
{F4}
LAYOUT
2/2
F1:SELECT A FILE
F2:NEW POINT
F3:GRID FACTOR P↓
2 Press the {F2} (NEW POINT).
{F2}
NEW POINT
F1:SIDE SHOT
F2:RESECTION
3 Press the {F2} (RESECTION) key.
{F2}
NEW POINT
PT#:
get the layout menu 2/2.
INPUT SRCH SKP ENTER
4 Press the {F1} (INPUT) key, and enter the new
{F1}
Enter PT#
{F4}
point name. *1), 2)
Press the {F4} (ENT) key.
INSTRUMENT HEIGHT
INPUT
INS.HT =
0.000 m
--- --- [CLR] [ENT]
8-14
8 LAYOUT
5 Enter instrument height in the same way.
Enter
INS.HT
{F4}
NO01#
PT#:
INPUT LIST NEZ ENTER
6 Enter the known point A number. *3)
7 Enter reflector height.
8 Collimate the known point A, and press the {F1}
(ANG) or {F2} (DIST) key.
Example:{F2} (DIST)
Distance measuring starts.
{F1}
Enter PT#
{F4}
REFLECTOR HEIGHT
INPUT
R.HT =
0.000 m
--- --- [CLR] [ENT]
Enter R.HT
{F4}
REFLECTOR HEIGHT
INPUT
R.HT :
1.235 m
ANG DIST NP/P ---
Collimate A
{F2}
HR:
123°40'20"
HD*[n]
< m
VD:
m
> Measuring...
< complete >
Known point B entering display will be shown.
NO02#
PT#:
INPUT LIST NEZ ENTER
9 Same as procedure 6 to 8 proceed to the known
SELECT GRID FACTOR
F1:USE LAST DATA
F2:CALC MEAS.DATA
point B.
When two points have been measured by the {F2}
(DIST) key, the RESIDUAL ERROR will be
calculated. *4)
10 Select GRID FACTOR for calculation of
RESIDUAL ERROR by pressing {F1} or {F2}
key. *5)
Example: {F1}
11 Press the {F1} (NEXT) key to measure other
points.
Maximum seven points can be measured.
{F1}
RESIDUAL ERROR
dHD=
0.015 m
dZ =
0.005 m
NEXT ––– G.F. CALC
{F1}
NO03#
PT#:
INPUT LIST NEZ ENTER
12 Same as procedure 6 to 8 proceed to the known
point C.
HR:
123°40'20"
HD*[n]
< m
VD:
m
> Measuring...
< complete >
HR: 123°40'20"
HD:
123.456 m
VD:
1.234 m
NEXT –––
––– CALC
8-15
8 LAYOUT
13 Press the {F4} (CALC) key. *6)
{F4}
Standard Deviation will be shown.
Unit: (sec.) or (mGON) or (mMIL)
Standard Deviation
=
1.23 sec.
–––
14 Press the {F2} (↓) key.
Standard Deviations of each coordinate will be
shown.
Unit: (mm) or (inch)
The display will be changed alternately by
pressing {F2} (↓) or (↑) key.
15 Press the {F4} (NEZ) key.
Coordinate data of the new point will be shown.
16 Press the {F3} (YES) key. *7)
The new point data will be stored into the
coordinate data file and the value of occupied
coordinate data will change to that of the
calculated NEW POINT.
↓
–––
NEZ
1.23
1.23
1.23
–––
mm
mm
mm
NEZ
{F2}
SD(n) :
SD(e) :
SD(z) :
–––
↑
{F4}
N :
E :
Z :
>REC ?
{F3}
NEW POINT
F1:SIDE SHOT
F2:RESECTION
65.432 m
876.543 m
1.234 m
[YES][NO]
The display returns to new point menu.
*1)
*2)
*3)
*4)
Refer to Section 2.4 “How to Enter Alphanumeric Characters”.
When there is no need to memorize the new point data, press the {F3} (SKP) key.
To enter the known point coordinate data by direct key inputting, press the {F3} (NEZ) key.
RESIDUAL ERROR;
dHD (Horizontal distance between two known points) =Measured value – Calculated value
dZ=(Z coordinate of the new point calculated from known point A) – (Z coordinate of the new point
calculated from known point B)
*5) [F1:USE LAST DATA]; RESIDUAL ERROR is calculated with GRID FACTOR already set.
[F2:CALC MEAS.DATA]; RESIDUAL ERROR is calculated without GRID FACTOR already set. In this
case, new GRID FACTOR is calculated from measured data and reset."
• To see the GRID FACTOR value, press the {F3} (G.F.) key.
*6) In case that the all points are measured by angle measurement only, the following display will be shown.
You can select Z coordinate calculation.
CALC. Z COORD.
F1:YES
F2:NO
F1(YES):
F2(NO):
:N,E,Z coordinates will be calculated with measured angle data.
:N and E coordinates will be calculated with measured horizontal angle data. Z coordinate
would not be calculated.
(Z coordinate value =0.000m)
When the distance measurement is done even one point, Z coordinate will be calculated as a mean
value of relative distance (vertical distance data).
*7) The display shows ">SET ?" when {F3} (SKP) key pressed in step 4. In this case, the new point data is
not stored into the coordinate data file, only the value of occupied coordinate data changes to that of the
calculated NEW POINT.
8-16
8 LAYOUT
 Viewing PT# LIST
You can see the PT# List and enter the data from the List, also you can see coordinate data of a point.
[Example: Executing Layout Mode]
Operating procedure
Operation
Display
LAYOUT
PT#:
INPUT LIST NEZ ENTER
1 While executing the LAYOUT mode, press the
{F2}
{F2} (LIST) key.
The arrow(→) indicates selected data.
2 By pressing the following keys, the list will
increase or decrease.
{ } or { }: Increasing or Decreasing one by one.
{ } or { }: By ten Increasing or Decreasing.
3 To show the coordinate of the selected data, press
the {F1} (VIEW) key.
{
{
} or {
} or {
{F1}
It is still possible to scroll the PT# data by pressing
{ } or { } key.
4 Press the {ESC} key.
{ESC}
The display returns to the List.
5 Press the {F4} (ENTER) key.
{F4}
The selected point number is set as PT#.
[TOPCON ]
→ DATA-01
DATA-02
VIEW SRCH ––– ENTER
}
}
DATA-49
→ DATA-50
DATA-51
VIEW SRCH –––
ENTER
PT#DATA-50
N
100.234 m
E
12.345 m
Z
1.678 m
DATA-49
→ DATA-50
DATA-51
VIEW SRCH –––
ENTER
REFLECTOR HEIGHT
INPUT
R.HT =
0.000 m
--- --- [CLR] [ENT]
 The operation of {F2} (SRCH) is same as the "SEARCH" in the MEMORY MANAGER MODE.
For more information, refer to Chapter 9 “MEMORY MANAGER MODE”.
8-17
9 MEMORY MANAGER MODE
9
MEMORY MANAGER MODE
The following items for internal memory are available in this mode.
1) FILE STATUS
: Checking the number of stored data / Remaining internal memory
capacity.
2) SEARCH
: Searching the recorded data.
3) FILE MAINTAN.
: Deleting files / Editing file name
4) COORD. INPUT : Inputting coordinate data into Coord. data file.
5) DELETE COORD. : Deleting coordinate data from Coord. data file.
6) PCODE INPUT
: Inputting PCODE DATA into PCODE Library
7) DATA TRANSFER : Sending measured data or coordinate data or PCODE Library data /
Uploading coordinate data or PCODE Library data / Setting
communication parameters
8) INITIALIZE
: Initializing internal memory.
 Memory manager menu operation
By pressing the {MENU} key, the instrument will be in MENU 2/4 mode.
Press the {F1} (MEMORY MGR.) key, the menu of MEMORY MGR. 1/3 will be shown.
Normal measurement mode
{MENU}
{ESC}
{F4}
MENU
2/4
F1:MEMORY MGR.
F2:PROGRAMS
F3:GRID FACTOR P↓
{ESC}
{F1}
MEMORY MGR.
1/3 MEMORY MGR. MENU 1/3
F1:FILE STATUS
F2:SEARCH
F3:FILE MAINTAN.P↓
{F4}
MEMORY MGR.
2/3 MEMORY MGR. MENU 2/3
F1:COORD. INPUT
F2:DELETE COORD
F3:PCODE INPUT P↓
{F4}
MEMORY MGR.
3/3 MEMORY MGR. MENU 3/3
F1:DATA TRANSFER
F2:INITIALIZE
P↓
{F4}
9-1
9 MEMORY MANAGER MODE
9.1 Display Internal Memory Status
This mode is used to check the internal memory status.
Operating procedure
Operation
Display
{F3}
MEMORY MGR.
1/3
F1:FILE STATUS
F2:SEARCH
F3:FILE MAINTAN P↓
{F1}
FILE STATUS
1/2
MEAS. FILE : 3
COORD. FILE: 6
[...........] P↓
1 Press the {F3} (MEMORY MGR.) key from the
menu 1/3.
2 Press the {F1} (FILE STATUS) key.
The total number of stored measured data files
and coordinate l files are shown.
Remaining memory capacity
3 Press the {F4} (P↓) key.
{F4}
The total number of stored measured data and
coordinate data in all files are shown.*1)
DATA STATUS
2/2
MEAS. DATA :0100
COORD. DATA:0050
[...........] P↓
*1) Each coordinate file has one extra data for working area.

•
•
The FILE/DATA STATUS display will change alternately by pressing {F4} (P↓) key.
To return to MEMORY MGR. menu press the {ESC} key.
9-2
9 MEMORY MANAGER MODE
9.2 Searching Data
This mode is used to search the recorded file data in the DATA COLLECT or LAYOUT mode.
The following 3 search methods in each type of files can be selected.
1:
2:
3:
First data search
Last data search
Point number search (MEAS.DATA, COORD.DATA)
Number search (PCODE LIB.)
MEAS. DATA
: Measured data in the data collect mode.
COORD. DATA : Coordinate data for layout, control points and new point data measured in the
layout mode.
PCODE LIB.
: The data which was registered with a number from 1 to 50 in Point code library.
Point name (PT#, BS#), ID, PCODE and Height data (INS.HT, R.HT) can be corrected in the searching
mode.
Measured value can not be corrected.
9.2.1 Measured Data Searching
Example: Point number searching
Operating procedure
Operation
1 Press the {F3} (MEMORY MGR.) key from the
Display
{F3}
MEMORY MGR.
1/3
F1:FILE STATUS
F2:SEARCH
F3:FILE MAINTAN P↓
2 Press the {F2} (SEARCH) key.
{F2}
SEARCH
F1:MEAS. DATA
F2:COORD. DATA
F3:PCODE LIB.
3 Press the {F1} (MEAS. DATA) key.
{F1}
SELECT A FILE
FN:_________
menu 1/3.
INPUT LIST ––– ENTER
4 Press the {F1} (INPUT) key and enter File Name.
Press the {F4} (ENT) key. *1),2)
5 Press the {F3} (PT# DATA) key.
{F1}
Enter FN
{F4}
{F3}
MEAS. DATA SEARCH
F1:FIRST DATA
F2:LAST DATA
F3:PT# DATA
PT# DATA SEARCH
PT#=_________
[ALP][SPC][CLR][ENT]
6 Enter PT#.
Enter PT#
{F4}
Press the {F4} (ENT) key. *1)
9-3
PT#TOP-104
1/2
V 
98°36'20"
HR 160°40'20"
TILT
0°00'00"
↓
9 MEMORY MANAGER MODE
7 Press the {F4} (↓) key to scroll data for selected
{F4}
point.
PT#TOP-104
PCODE
R.HT 1.200 m
EDIT
2/2
↓
*1) Refer to Section 2.6 "How to enter alphanumeric characters".
*2) To show the file list, press the {F2} (LIST) key.

•
•
•
" " represents data shown on the display is the stored data.
Press the { } or { } key to scroll to next or previous point.
To search MEAS. DATA of the same point number, press { } or {
} key.
 To edit the data in searching mode
Point name (PT#, BS#), ID, PCODE and Height data (INS.HT, R.HT) can be corrected in the
searching mode.
Measured value can not be corrected.
Operating procedure
Operation
Display
PT#TOP-104
2/2
PCODE
R.HT
1.000 m
EDIT
↓
1 Press the {F1} (EDIT) key from last page of
{F1}
displayed data.
2 Select the item to correct by pressing {
} or {
}
key.
3 Press the {F1} (INPUT) key and enter data. *1)
{
} or {
}
{F1}
Enter Data
{F4}
{F4}
Press the {F4} (ENT) key.
4 Press the {F4} (ENTER) key.
5 Press the {F3} (YES) key.
{F3}
PT#
PCODE
R.HT
INPUT
→TOP-104
:
:
1.000 m
––– ––– ENTER
PT#
PCODE
R.HT
INPUT
:TOP-104
:
→
1.000 m
––– ––– ENTER
PT#
→TOP-104
PCODE :
R.HT :
1.200 m
>SAVE?
[YES][NO]
PT#TOP-104
2/2
PCODE
R.HT
1.200 m
EDIT
*1) Refer to Section 2.4 “How to Enter Alphanumeric Characters”.

•
•
When editing, ID and PCODE are not linked with PCODE LIBRARY.
Even though the height data (INS.HT, R.HT) are corrected, the measured value can not be corrected.
9-4
9 MEMORY MANAGER MODE
9.2.2 Coordinate Data Searching
Example searching: Point number searching
Operating procedure
Operation
Display
{F3}
MEMORY MGR.
1/3
F1:FILE STATUS
F2:SEARCH
F3:FILE MAINTAN P↓
2 Press the {F2} (SEARCH) key.
{F2}
SEARCH
F1:MEAS. DATA
F2:COORD. DATA
F3:PCODE LIB.
3 Press the {F2} (COORD. DATA) key.
{F2}
SELECT A FILE
FN:_________
1 Press the {F3} (MEMORY MGR.) key from the
menu 1/3.
INPUT LIST ––– ENTER
4 Press the {F1} (INPUT) key and enter File Name.
{F1}
Enter FN
{F4}
Press the {F4} (ENT) key. *1)
5 Press the {F3} (PT# DATA) key.
COORD. DATA SEARCH
F1:FIRST DATA
F2:LAST DATA
F3:PT# DATA
{F3}
PT# DATA SEARCH
PT#=_________
[ALP][SPC][CLR][ENT]
6 Enter PT#.
Enter PT#
{F4}
Press the {F4} (ENT) key. *1)
7 Press the {F4} (↓ ) key to get the next page.
PT#TOP-104
1/2
N  100.234 m
E 
12.345 m
Z 
1.678 m
↓
{F4}
PCODE  TOPS
STR. 
2/2
↓
*1) Refer to Section 2.4 “How to Enter Alphanumeric Characters”.

•
•
•
•
" " represents data shown on the display is the stored data.
Press the { } or { } key to scroll to next or previous point.
To search COORD. DATA of the same point number, press the {
PTL data will be shown below.
} or {
PT#TOP-105
1/2
L 
10.000 m
O 
20.000 m
E 
0.000 m
↓
{F4}
PCODE
STR.
FROM
TO

TOPS
2/2



TOP-101
TOP-102
9-5
↓
} key.
9 MEMORY MANAGER MODE
9.2.3 PCODE LIBRARY Searching
Example searching: Number searching
Operating procedure
Operation
Display
{F3}
MEMORY MGR.
1/3
F1:FILE STATUS
F2:SEARCH
F3:FILE MAINTAN P↓
2 Press the {F2} (SEARCH) key.
{F2}
SEARCH
F1:MEAS. DATA
F2:COORD. DATA
F3:PCODE LIB.
3 Press the {F3} (PCODE LIB.) key.
{F3}
PCODE DATA SEARCH
F1:FIRST DATA
F2:LAST DATA
F3:No. SEARCH
4 Press the {F3} (No. SEARCH) key.
{F3}
PCODE No. SEARCH
No.=
1 Press the {F3} (MEMORY MGR.) key from the
menu 1/3.
--- --- [CLR] [ENT]
5 Enter number.Press the {F4} (ENT) key. *1)
Enter PT#
{F4}
The number and linked data will be shown. *2)
*1) Refer to Section 2.4 “How to Enter Alphanumeric Characters”.
• Press the { } or { } key to scroll to next or PCODE data.
*2) To correct the PCODE data, press the {F1} (EDIT) key.
To delete the PCODE data, press the {F3} (CLR) key.
9-6
011:NAKADAI
→012:HILLTOP
013:ITABASH
EDIT ––– CLR
–––
9 MEMORY MANAGER MODE
9.3 File Maintenance
In this mode, the following items are available.
Renaming file name / Searching data in a file / Deleting files
 FILE MAINTAN. menu
MEMORY MGR.
1/3
F1:FILE STATUS
F2:SEARCH
F3:FILE MAINTAN. P↓
{ESC}
{F3}
@AMIDAT
→ ∗MEASD1
&COORD1
REN SRCH
/C0123
/M0123
/C0056
DEL –––
Deleting file
Searching data in a file
Renaming file name
Pressing {F3} (FILE MAINTAN.) key from MEMORY MANAGER menu 1/3, file list will be shown.
• File discrimination mark (*,@,&)
File discrimination mark (*,@,&) placed before file name indicates the file status.
For measured data file
“ * ” selected file for DATA COLLECT mode.
For coordinate data file
“ * ” selected file for LAYOUT mode.
“ @ ” selected coordinate file for DATA COLLECT mode.
“ & ” selected coordinate file for both LAYOUT and DATA COLLECT mode.
• Data discrimination character (M, C)
Data discrimination character (M, C) placed before four figures indicates the type of data.
“ M ” : Measured data
“ C ” : Coordinate data.
• Four figures means the total number of data in the file.
(Coordinate data file has an extra data for working.)
Press the { } or { } key to scroll to next file.
9-7
9 MEMORY MANAGER MODE
9.3.1 Rename a File
An existing file in internal memory can be renamed.
Operating procedure
Operation
1 Press the {F3} (FILE MAINTAN.) key from the
{F3}
Memory manager menu 1/3.
2 Select a file by pressing {
} or {
Display
} key.
{
} or {
3 Press the {F1} (REN) key.
}
{F1}
4 Enter new file name.
/M0123
/C0056
DEL –––
MEASD1
→COORD1
COORD2
REN SRCH
/M0123
/C0056
/C0098
DEL –––
MEASD1
/M0123
=COORD1
/C0056
COORD1
/C0098
[ALP][SPC][CLR][ENT]
Enter FN
{F4}
Press the {F4} (ENT) key. *1)
→MEASD1
COORD1
REN SRCH
MEASD1
→COORD5
COORD1
REN SRCH
/M0123
/C0056
/C0098
DEL –––
*1) Refer to Section 2.4 “How to Enter Alphanumeric Characters”.
Existing file name can not be available.
To return to the FILE MAINTAN. Menu, press the {ESC} key.
9.3.2 Searching Data in a File
An existing file in internal memory can be searched.
Operating procedure
Operation
1 Press the {F3} (FILE MAINTAN.) key from the
{F3}
Memory manager menu 1/3.
2 Select a file to search by pressing {
} or {
Display
}
{
key.
3 Press the {F2} (SRCH) key.
} or {
}
{F2}
4 Select searching method by pressing the {F1} to
{F3} key. *1)
→MEASD1
COORD1
REN SRCH
/M0123
/C0056
DEL –––
MEASD1
→COORD1
COORD2
REN SRCH
/M0123
/C0056
/C0098
DEL –––
SEARCH
[COORD1 ]
F1:FIRST DATA
F2:LAST DATA
F3:PT# DATA
{F1} to {F3}
*1) Because procedures from next are same as procedures of Section 9.2 "Searching Data", refer to
Section 9.2 “Searching Data”
To return to the FILE MAINTAN. Menu, press the {ESC} key.
9-8
9 MEMORY MANAGER MODE
9.3.3 Deleting a File
This mode erases a file from internal memory. Only one file can be erased at a time.
Operating procedure
Operation
1 Press the {F3} (FILE MAINTAN.) key from the
{F3}
Memory manager menu 1/3.
2 Select a file to delete by pressing {
} or {
Display
} key.
{
} or {
}
→MEASD1
COORD1
REN SRCH
/M0123
/C0056
DEL –––
MEASD1
→COORD1
COORD2
REN SRCH
/M0123
/C0056
/C0098
DEL –––
3 Press the {F3} (DEL) key.
{F3}
MEASD1
→COORD1
COORD2
>DELETE?
/M0123
/C0056
/C0098
[NO][YES]
4 Confirm the deleting, and press the {F4} (YES)
{F4}
MEASD1
→COORD2
COORD3
REN SRCH
/M0123
/C0098
/C0321
DEL –––
key.
 To return to the FILE MAINTAN. Menu, press the {ESC} key.
9-9
9 MEMORY MANAGER MODE
9.4 Coordinate Data Direct Key Input
9.4.1 Coordinate data input
Coordinate data for the layout point or control point can be input directly from the keyboard. This data
can be stored into a file in the internal memory.
Operating procedure
Operation
Display
{F3}
MEMORY MGR.
1/3
F1:FILE STATUS
F2:SEARCH
F3:FILE MAINTAN P↓
2 Press the {F4} (P↓) key.
{F4}
MEMORY MGR.
2/3
F1:COORD. INPUT
F2:DELETE COORD.
F3:PCODE INPUT
P↓
3 Press the {F1} (COORD. INPUT) key.
{F1}
SELECT A FILE
FN:_________
1 Press the {F3} (MEMORY MGR.) key from the
menu 1/3.
INPUT LIST ––– ENTER
4 Press the {F1} (INPUT) key and enter File Name
you want to input.
Press the {F4} (ENT) key. *1)
5 Select the kind of coordinates.
NEZ: Coordinate data
PTL: The coordinate data for point to line
{F1}
Enter FN
{F4}
COORD. DATA INPUT
F1:NEZ
F2:PTL
{F1}
COORD. DATA INPUT
PT#:_________
INPUT LIST ––– ENTER
6 Press the {F1} (INPUT) key and enter PT#.
Press the {F4} (ENT) key. *1)
7 Enter data.
Press the {F4} (ENT) key. *1)
{F1}
Enter PT#
{F4}
N=
100.234
E:
12.345
Z:
1.678
--- --- [CLR]
Enter data
{F4}
COORD. DATA INPUT
PCODE:_________
m
m
m
[ENT]
INPUT LIST ––– ENTER
8 Enter PCODE and press the {F4} (ENTER).
Next input display is shown, point number (PT#) is
automatically incremented.
{F1}
Enter PCODE
{F4}
*1) Refer to Section 2.4 “How to Enter Alphanumeric Characters”.
9-10
COORD. DATA INPUT
PT#:TOPCON-102
INPUT –––
––– ENTER
9 MEMORY MANAGER MODE
9.4.2 PTL (Point to Line) data input
PTL Coordinate data for the layout point or control point can be input directly from the keyboard. This
data can be stored into a file in the internal memory.
Operating procedure
Operation
Display
{F3}
MEMORY MGR.
1/3
F1:FILE STATUS
F2:SEARCH
F3:FILE MAINTAN P↓
2 Press the {F4} (P↓) key.
{F4}
MEMORY MGR.
2/3
F1:COORD. INPUT
F2:DELETE COORD.
F3:PCODE INPUT
P↓
3 Press the {F1} (COORD. INPUT) key.
{F1}
SELECT A FILE
FN:_________
1 Press the {F3} (MEMORY MGR.) key from the
menu 1/3.
INPUT LIST ––– ENTER
4 Press the {F1} (INPUT) key and enter File Name
you want to input.
Press the {F4} (ENT) key. *1)
5 Select the kind of coordinates.
NEZ: Coordinate data
PTL: The coordinate data for point to line
{F1}
Enter FN
{F4}
COORD. DATA INPUT
F1:NEZ
F2:PTL
{F2}
COORD. DATA INPUT
PT#:_________
INPUT LIST ––– ENTER
6 Press the {F1} (INPUT) key and enter PT#.
{F1}
Enter PT#
{F4}
Press the {F4} (ENT) key. *1)
7 Enter data.
Press the {F4} (ENT) key. *1)
L: Line
O: Offset
E: Elevation
Enter PCODE, FROM and TO data and press the
{F4} (ENTER).*2)
Next input display is shown, point number (PT#) is
automatically incremented.
L=
O:
E:
--- --- [CLR]
m
m
m
[ENT]
Enter data
{F4}
PCODE→_________
FROM:
TO :
INPUT LIST ––– ENTER
{F1}
Enter PCODE
{F4}
COORD. DATA INPUT
PT#:TOPCON-102
INPUT –––
––– ENTER
*1) Refer to Section 2.4 “How to Enter Alphanumeric Characters”.
*2) When the inputted point name data as FROM or TO, does not exist in the same file, an error will be
displayed.
9-11
9 MEMORY MANAGER MODE
9.5 Delete a Coordinate Data from a File
Coordinate data in a file can be erased.
Operating procedure
Operation
Display
{F3}
MEMORY MGR.
1/3
F1:FILE STATUS
F2:SEARCH
F3:FILE MAINTAN P↓
2 Press the {F4} (P↓) key.
{F4}
MEMORY MGR.
2/3
F1:COORD. INPUT
F2:DELETE COORD.
F3:PCODE INPUT
P↓
3 Press the {F2} (DELETE COORD.) key.
{F2}
SELECT A FILE
FN:_________
1 Press the {F3} (MEMORY MGR.) key from the
menu 1/3.
INPUT LIST ––– ENTER
4 Press the {F1} (INPUT) key and enter File Name.
Press the {F4} (ENT) key. *1)
{F1}
Enter FN
{F4}
DELETE COORD.
PT#:_________
INPUT LIST ––– ENTER
5 Press the {F1} (INPUT) key and enter PT#.
{F1}
Enter PT#
{F4}
Press the {F4} (ENT) key. *1)
6 Confirm the data and press the {F3} (YES) key.
Deleting starts.
The display will return to the previous display.
N:
100.234 m
E:
12.345 m
Z:
1.678 m
>DELETE? [YES][NO]
{F3}
*1) Refer to Section 2.4 “How to Enter Alphanumeric Characters”.

•
Even if an individual coordinate data is deleted, the internal memory usage does not change.
Delete the file including coordinate data to decrease the memory usage.
9-12
9 MEMORY MANAGER MODE
9.6 Editing PCODE Library
PCODE data can be entered into PCODE Library in this mode.
A PCODE is linked with a number of 1 to 50
PCODE can be also edited in DATA COLLECT menu 2/3 in the same way.
Operating procedure
Operation
Display
{F3}
MEMORY MGR.
1/3
F1:FILE STATUS
F2:SEARCH
F3:FILE MAINTAN. P↓
2 Press the {F4} (P↓) key.
{F4}
MEMORY MGR.
2/3
F1:COORD. INPUT
F2:DELETE COORD.
F3:PCODE INPUT
P↓
3 Press the {F3} (PCODE INPUT) key.
{F3}
1 Press the {F3} (MEMORY MGR.) key from the
menu 1/3.
4 By pressing the following keys, the list will
increase or decrease.
{ } or { }: Increasing or Decreasing one by one.
{ } or { }: By ten Increasing or Decreasing.
5 Press the {F1} (EDIT) key.
{
{
} or {
} or {
}
}
{F1}
6 Enter PCODE and press the {F4} (ENT) key. *1)
Enter PCODE
{F4}
*1) Refer to Section 2.4 “How to Enter Alphanumeric Characters”.
9-13
→001:TOPCON
002:TOKYO
EDIT –––
CLR
–––
011:URAH
→ 012:AMIDAT
013:HILLTO
EDIT –––
CLR
–––
011:URAH
→ 012=AMIDAT
013:HILLTO
[ALP][SPC][CLR][ENT]
011:URAH
→ 012:AMISUN
013:HILLTO
EDIT –––
CLR
–––
9 MEMORY MANAGER MODE
9.7 Data Communications
You can send a data file stored in the internal memory to a computer directly. Also, you can directly load
a coordinate data file and PCODE Library data to the internal memory from the computer.
9.7.1 Sending Data
Example: Sending a Measured data file
Operating procedure
Operation
Display
{F3}
MEMORY MGR.
1/3
F1:FILE STATUS
F2:SEARCH
F3:FILE MAINTAN P↓
{F4}
{F4}
MEMORY MGR.
3/3
F1:DATA TRANSFER
F2:INITIALIZE
P↓
3 Press the {F1} (DATA TRANSFER) key.
{F1}
SELECT COM
[F1:BLUETOOTH]
F2:RS-232C
F3:USB
ENTER
4 Press the {F2} (RS-232C) key.*1)
{F2}
5 Press the {F4} (ENTER) key.
{F4}
DATA TRANSFER
F1:GTS FORMAT
F2:SSS FORMAT
6 Select data format.
{F1}
DATA TRANSFER
F1:SEND DATA
F2:LOAD DATA
F3:COMM. PARAMETERS
7 Press the {F1} (SEND DATA) key.
{F1}
SEND DATA
F1:MEAS. DATA
F2:COORD. DATA
F3:PCODE DATA
8 Select the type of data to send by pressing {F1}-
{F1}
SELECT A FILE
FN:_________
1 Press the {F3} (MEMORY MGR.) key from the
menu 1/3.
2 Press the {F4} (P↓) key twice.
GTS format: The conventional data
SSS format: Including PCODE data, ‘From’ and
‘To’ data for Point to Line.
{F3} key.
Example: {F1} (MEAS. DATA)
INPUT LIST ––– ENTER
9 Press the {F1} (INPUT) key and enter File Name
you want to send. Press the {F4} (ENT) key.
*2),3),4)
9-14
{F1}
Enter FN
{F4}
SEND MEAS. DATA
>OK ?
––– –––
[YES][NO]
9 MEMORY MANAGER MODE
10 Press the {F3} (YES) key.*5)
{F3}
The sending starts.
The display will return to menu.
*1)
*2)
*3)
*4)
*5)
SEND MEAS. DATA
< Sending Data!>
STOP
Only for built-in Bluetooth model
Refer to Section 2.4 “How to Enter Alphanumeric Characters”.
To scroll the data, press the { } or { } key.
To show the file list, press the {F2} (LIST) key.
To cancel the sending, press the {F4} (STOP) key.
9-15
9 MEMORY MANAGER MODE
9.7.2 Loading Data
Coordinate data files and PCODE Library data can be loaded from PC.
Example: Loading a coordinate data file (from PC)
Operating procedure
Operation
Display
{F3}
MEMORY MGR.
1/3
F1:FILE STATUS
F2:SEARCH
F3:FILE MAINTAN P↓
{F4}
{F4}
MEMORY MGR.
3/3
F1:DATA TRANSFER
F2:INITIALIZE
P↓
3 Press the {F1} (DATA TRANSFER) key.
{F1}
SELECT COM
[F1:BLUETOOTH]
F2:RS-232C
F3:USB
ENTER
4 Press the {F2} (RS-232C) key.
{F2}
5 Press the {F4} (ENTER) key.
{F4}
DATA TRANSFER
F1:GTS FORMAT
F2:SSS FORMAT
6 Press the {F1} (GTS FORMAT) key.
{F1}
DATA TRANSFER
F1:SEND DATA
F2:LOAD DATA
F3:COMM. PARAMETERS
7 Press the {F2} (LOAD DATA) key.
{F2}
LOAD DATA
F1:COORD. DATA
F2:PCODE DATA
8 Select the type of data to load by pressing
{F1}
COORD. FILE NAME
FN=_________
1 Press the {F3} (MEMORY MGR.) key from the
menu 1/3.
2 Press the {F4} (P↓) key twice.
{F1} or {F2} key.
Example: {F1} (COORD. DATA)
[ALP][SPC][CLR][ENT]
9 Enter New File Name you want to receive. Press
the {F4} (ENT) key. *1)
Enter FN
{F4}
LOAD COORD. DATA
>OK ?
––– –––
10 Press the {F3} (YES) key.*2)
{F3}
The loading starts.
The display will return to menu.
[YES][NO]
LOAD COORD. DATA
< Loading Data!>
STOP
*1) Refer to Section 2.4 “How to Enter Alphanumeric Characters”.
*2) To cancel the loading, press the {F4} (STOP) key.
9-16
9 MEMORY MANAGER MODE
9.7.3 Setting Parameter of Data Communications
 Items of the Parameter
Item
Selecting Item
Contents
[ACK/NAK],
[ONE WAY]
Setting Protocol
[ACK/NAK] or [ONE WAY] communication
F2: Baud rate
1200, 2400, 4800,
9600, 19200, 38400
Setting transfer speed
1200/2400/4800/9600/19200/38400 baud
F3: Char. / Parity
[7/EVEN], [7/ODD],
[8/NON]
Setting data length and parity.
[7bit, even], [7bit, odd], [8bit,none]
F1: Protocol
F1: Stop Bits
1, 2
 Example Setting
Setting Stop 1 bit or 2bits
Baud rate: 19200 baud
Operating procedure
Operation
Display
{F3}
MEMORY MGR.
1/3
F1:FILE STATUS
F2:SEARCH
F3:FILE MAINTAN P↓
{F4}
{F4}
MEMORY MGR.
3/3
F1:DATA TRANSFER
F2:INITIALIZE
P↓
3 Press the {F1} (DATA TRANSFER) key.
{F1}
SELECT COM
[F1:BLUETOOTH]
F2:RS-232C
F3:USB
ENTER
4 Press the {F2} (RS-232C) key. *1)
{F2}
5 Press the {F4} (ENTER) key.
{F4}
DATA TRANSFER
F1:GTS FORMAT
F2:SSS FORMAT
6 Press the {F1} (GTS FORMAT) key.
{F1}
DATA TRANSFER
F1:SEND DATA
F2:LOAD DATA
F3:COMM. PARAMETERS
7 Press the {F3} (COMM. PARAMETERS) key.
{F3}
COMM. PARAMETERS 1/2
F1:PROTOCOL
F2:BAUD RATE
F3:CHAR./PARITY P↓
8 Press the {F2} (BAUD RATE) key.
{F2}
BAUD RATE
[1200] 2400 4800
9600 19200 38400
ENTER
{
{
BAUD RATE
1200
2400 4800
9600 [19200]38400
ENTER
1 Press the {F3} (MEMORY MGR.) key from the
menu 1/3.
2 Press the {F4} (P↓) key twice.
[
] indicates present setting.
9 Select the items by pressing {
and {
} or {
}, {
}
} keys. *2)
9-17
}
}
9 MEMORY MANAGER MODE
10 Press the {F4} (ENTER) key.
{F4}
COMM. PARAMETERS 1/2
F1:PROTOCOL
F2:BAUD RATE
F3:CHAR./PARITY P↓
*1) Only for built-in Bluetooth model
*2) To cancel setting, press the {ESC} key.
9.7.4 Confirming the parameters for Bluetooth communication
(Only for built-in Bluetooth model)
The communication parameters for the Bluetooth are fixed as follows. You can only confirm the
parameters in Memory manager mode.
 Fixed parameters for Bluetooth communication
Item
Fixed parameters
Baud rate
38400 baud (Maximum effective speed)
Char. / Parity
8bit, none
Stop Bits
Stop 1 bit
9-18
9 MEMORY MANAGER MODE
9.8 Initialization
This mode is used to initialize the internal memory.
Following data can be initialized.
FILE DATA
: All files of measuring data and coordinate data
PCODE DATA : PCODE LIST
ALL DATA
: FILE DATA and PCODE DATA

•
The following data are not initialized even if initialization is executed.
: Coordinates of the instrument, Instrument height and Reflector height.
Example Initialization: ALL DATA (FILE data and PCODE data)
Operating procedure
Operation
Display
{F3}
MEMORY MGR.
1/3
F1:FILE STATUS
F2:SEARCH
F3:FILE MAINTAN. P↓
{F4}
{F4}
MEMORY MGR.
3/3
F1:DATA TRANSFER
F2:INITIALIZE
P↓
3 Press the {F2} (INITIALIZE) key.
{F2}
INITIALIZE
F1:FILE AREA
F2:PCODE LIST
F3:ALL DATA
4 Select the data to initialize by pressing one of the
{F3}
INITIALIZE DATA
ERASE ALL DATA !
1 Press the {F3} (MEMORY MGR.) key from the
menu 1/3.
2 Press the {F4} (P↓) key twice.
{F1} to {F3} key.
Example: {F3} (ALL DATA)
>OK ?
5 Confirm the erase data, press the {F4} (YES) key.
Initializing will start.
{F4}
[NO][YES]
INITIALIZE DATA
<Initializing!>
The display returns to menu.
MEMORY MGR.
3/3
F1:DATA TRANSFER
F2:INITIALIZE
P↓
9-19
10 SET AUDIO MODE
10
SET AUDIO MODE
The light acceptance quantity level for the EDM (SIGNAL), the atmospheric correction value (PPM),
and prism constant correction value of each target are displayed in this mode.
When reflected light from the prism is received a buzzer sounds. This function is good for easy
collimation when the target is difficult to find.
Operating procedure
Operation
1 Press the {F4} key to get the soft key page 2 in the
distance measurement mode or page 3 in the
coordinate measurement.
{F4}
2 Press the {F3} (S/A) key to change to set audio
mode.
The display indicates correction value of prism
constant (PSM), non-prism constant (NPM), sheet
constant (SHT), atmospheric correction (PPM)
and reflection light level (SIGNAL).
{F3}
Display
HR: 120°30'40"
HD*
123.456 m
VD:
5.678 m
MEAS MODE NP/P P1↓
OFSET S.O S/A P2↓
PSM:0.0
PPM
NPM:0.0
SHT:
SIGNAL:[IIIII]
PRISM PPM T-P
 When receiving reflected light, buzzer sounds.
It is possible to stop the sound, see Chapter 17 “SELECTING MODE” .
 The {F1} to {F3} keys are used for setting atmospheric correction and prism constant.
 To return to normal measuring mode, press the {ESC} key.
10-1
0.0
0.0
–––
11 SETTING THE PRISM CONSTANT VALUE
11
SETTING THE PRISM CONSTANT VALUE
The prism constant value of Topcon is set to zero. When using prisms other than Topcon’s, it is
necessary to set the prism constant correction value of that specific prism.
Once you set the correction value for prism constant, it is retained after power is OFF.

•
Confirm the non-prism constant value is set at 0 when measuring target such as walls in Non-prism
mode.
Operating procedure
Operation
1 Press the {F4} key to get the soft key page 2 in the
distance measurement mode or page 3 in the
coordinate measurement.
{F4}
2 Press the {F3} (S/A).
{F3}
3 Press the {F1} (PRISM) key.
4 Input prism constant correction value. Press {F4}
(ENT) to move to the next item.
PRISM: Prism Constant Correction Value
N_PSM: Non-prism Constant Correction Value
SHEET: Sheet Constant Correction Value
Display
HR: 120°30'40"
HD*
123.456 m
VD:
5.678 m
MEAS MODE NP/P P1↓
OFSET S.O S/A P2↓
PSM:0.0
PPM
NPM:0.0
SHT:
SIGNAL:[IIIII]
PRISM PPM T-P
–––
{F1}
PRISM =0.0
mm
N_PSM : 0.0 mm
SHEET : 0.0 mm
––– ––– [CLR][ENT]
Enter value
{F4}
PRISM : 14.0 mm
N_PSM =0.0
mm
SHEET : 0.0 mm
––– ––– [CLR][ENT]
When all the values are set, previous screen is
restored.
PSM:14.0 PPM
NPM:0.0
SHT:
SIGNAL:[IIIII]
PRISM PPM T-P
*1) Refer to Section 2.4 “How to Enter Alphanumeric Characters”.
 Input range: –99.9mm to 99.9mm,0.1mm step.
11-1
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
–––
12 SETTING ATMOSPHERIC CORRECTION
12
SETTING ATMOSPHERIC CORRECTION
The velocity of the light beam used for measurement varies according atmospheric conditions such as
temperature and air pressure. Set the atmospheric correction factor when you wish to take this
influence into account when measuring.
The ES is designed so that the correction factor is 0 ppm at an air pressure of 1013 hPa, a temperature
of 15°C, and a humidity of 50%.
The values are kept in the memory even after power is OFF.
12.1 Calculation of Atmospheric Correction
By inputting the temperature and air pressure values, the atmospheric correction value is calculated
using the following formula and set into the memory. (humidity is regarded as 50%)
Atmospheric Correction Factor (ppm) =
0.294362 × p
0.04127 × e
282.324 – ------------------------------------------ + -----------------------------------------1 + 0.003661 × t 1 + 0.003661 × t
t
p
e
h
E
•
: Air temperature (°C)
: Pressure (hPa)
: Water vapor pressure (hPa)
: Relative humidity (%)
: Saturated water vapor pressure
e (water vapor pressure) can be calculated using the following formula.
E
e = h × ---------100
E = 6.11 × 10
( 7.5 × t )
---------------------------( t + 237.3 )
With constant pressure, a temperature change of 1°C: an index change of 1 ppm.
With constant temperature, a pressure change of 3.6 hPa: an index change of 1 ppm.
To perform high accuracy measurements, it is necessary to find the atmospheric correction factor from
even more accurate temperature and pressure measurements and perform an atmospheric correction.
It is recommended that extremely precise instruments be used to monitor the air temperature and
pressure.
•
Determine the temperature and pressure as follows.
Flat terrain
:Use the temperature and pressure at the midpoint of the line.
Mountainous terrain :Use the temperature and pressure at the intermediate point (C).
If it is not possible to measure the temperature and pressure at the midpoint, take the temperature
and pressure at the instrument station (A) and the target station (B), then calculate the average
value.
Average air temperature:(t1 + t2)/2
Average air pressure :(p1 + p2)/2
•
If the weather correction is not required, set the ppm value to 0.
12-1
12 SETTING ATMOSPHERIC CORRECTION
12.2 Setting of Atmospheric Correction Value
 How to Set Temperature and Pressure Value Directly
Measure the temperature and air pressure surrounding the instrument beforehand.
Example: Temperature: 26°C, Pressure:1017 hPa
Operating procedure
Operation
1 Press the {F4} key to get the soft key page 2 in the
distance measurement mode or page 3 in the
coordinate measurement.
2 Press the {F3} (S/A) key to set Set Audio Mode
from distance or coordinate measurement mode.
3 Press the {F3} (T-P) key.
{F4}
{F3}
{F3}
4 Input Temperature value and Pressure value.*1)
Mode returns to Set Audio mode.
Enter Temp.
Enter Pres.
Display
HR: 120°30'40"
HD*
123.456
VD:
5.678
MEAS MODE NP/P
OFSET S.O S/A
PSM:0.0
PPM
NPM:0.0
SHT:
SIGNAL:[IIIII]
PRISM PPM T-P
0.0
0.0
–––
TEMP. & PRES. SET
TEMP. =15.0
°C
PRES. : 1013.2 hPa
--- --- [CLR] [ENT]
TEMP.
TEMP.
PRES.
INPUT
& PRES. SET
:
26.0 °C
: 1017.0 hPa
––– ––– ENTER
*1) Refer to Section 2.4 “How to Enter Alphanumeric Characters”.
 Range: Temp. –30 to 60°C (0.1°C step) or –22 to 140°F (0.1°F step)
Pres. 560 to 1066.0hPa (0.1hPa step), 420 to 800mmHg (0.1mmHg step) or
16.5 to 31.5inHg (0.1inHg step)
12-2
m
m
P1↓
P2↓
12 SETTING ATMOSPHERIC CORRECTION
 How to Set the Atmospheric Correction Value Directly
Measure the temperature and air pressure to find atmospheric correction value (PPM) from the chart or
correction formula.
Operating procedure
Operation
1 Press the {F4} key to get the soft key page 2 in the
Display
HR: 120°30'40"
HD* 123.456 m
VD:
5.678 m
MEAS MODE NP/P P1↓
OFSET S.O S/A P2↓
{F4}
distance measurement mode or page 3 in the
coordinate measurement.
2 Press the {F3} (S/A) key to set Set Audio Mode
{F3}
from distance or coordinate measurement mode.
3 Press the {F2} (PPM) key.
PSM:0.0
PPM
NPM:0.0
SIGNAL:[IIIII]
PRISM PPM T-P
{F2}
Current setting value is displayed.
PPM SET
PPM =
0.0
0.0
–––
ppm
--- --- [CLR] [ENT]
4 Enter atmospheric correction value. *1)
Enter Data
{F4}
Mode returns to Set Audio mode.
*1) Refer to Section 2.4 “How to Enter Alphanumeric Characters”.
 Input range: –999.9ppm to 999.9ppm,0.1ppm step
 Atmospheric Correction Chart (For your reference)
1100
-50
1050
-40
-30
0
-20
1000
-10
500
10
20
900
1000
30
40
850
1500
50
60
800
2000
70
80
2500
750
90
100
3000
700
110
650
-20
-10
0
10
20
Temperature ( C)
12-3
30
40
50
Elevation (m)
Atmospheric pressure (hPa)
0
950
13 CORRECTION FOR REFRACTION AND EARTH CURVATURE
13
CORRECTION FOR REFRACTION AND EARTH
CURVATURE
The instrument measures distance, taking into account correction for refraction and earth curvature.
13.1 Distance Calculation Formula
Distance Calculation Formula; with correction for refraction and earth curvature taken into account.
Follow the Formula below for converting horizontal and vertical distances.
Horizontal distance D = AC(α)
Vertical distance Z = BC(α)
D = L{cosα - (2θ - γ) sinα}
Z = L{sinα + (θ - γ) cosα}
θ = L • cosα/2R : Earth curvature correcting item
g = K • Lcosα/2R: Atmospheric refraction correcting item
K = 0.14 or 0.20: Coefficient of refraction
R = 6371km
: Radius of earth
a
: Altitude angle
L
: Slope distance
•
Changing "K (Coefficient of refraction)" value : see
Chapter 17 “SELECTING MODE” .
13-1
Radius of earth
R=6371km
14 POWER SOURCE AND CHARGING
14
POWER SOURCE AND CHARGING
14.1 Battery Charging
Be sure to charge the battery fully before using it for the first time or after not using it for long
periods.

•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
The charger will become rather hot during use. This is normal.
Do not use to charge batteries other than those specified.
The charger is for indoor use only. Do not use outdoors.
Batteries cannot be charged, even when the charging lamp is flashing, when the temperature is
outside the charging temperature range.
Do not charge the battery just after charging is completed. Battery performance may decline.
Remove batteries from the charger before putting into storage.
When not in use, disconnect the power cable plug from the wall outlet.
Store the battery in a dry room where the temperature is within the following ranges. For long-term
storage, the battery should be charged at least once every six months.
Storage period
•
Temperature range
1 week or less
-20 to 50°C
1 week to 1 month
-20 to 45°C
1 month to 6 months
-20 to 40°C
6 months to 1 year
-20 to 35°C
Batteries generate power using a chemical reaction and as a result have a limited lifetime. Even
when in storage and not used for long periods, battery capacity deteriorates with the passage of
time. This may result in the operating time of the battery shortening despite having been charged
correctly. In this event, a new battery is required.
 PROCEDURE
1
Connect the power cable to the charger and plug the
charger into the wall outlet.
2
Mount the battery in the charger by matching the
grooves on the battery with the guides on the charger.
When charging starts, the lamp starts blinking.
3
Charging takes approximately 2.5 hours (BDC46C:
25°C).
The lamp lights when charging is finished.
4
Remove the battery and unplug the charger.

•
•
•
Slots 1 and 2:
The charger starts charging the battery mounted first. If you place two batteries in
the charger, the battery in slot 1 is charged first, and then the battery in slot 2.
(step 2)
Charging lamp: The charging lamp is off when the charger is outside the charging temperature
range or when the battery is mounted incorrectly. If the lamp is still off after the
charger falls within its charging temperature range and the battery is mounted
again, contact your local dealer. (steps 2 and 3)
Charging time: BDC46C: about 2.5 hours (at 25°C)
BDC70 (optional accessory): about 5.5 hours (at 25°C)
(Charging can take longer than the times stated above when temperatures are
either especially high or low).
14-1
14 POWER SOURCE AND CHARGING
14.2 Installing/Removing the Battery
Mount the charged battery.

•
•
•
•
•
Use the provided battery BDC46C/BDC70 (optional accessory) for this instrument.
The Battery BDC46C should be inserted to the battery adapter SB178 before mounting it to the
instrument. If the adaptor is exposed to heavy shocks, the battery may come off the adaptor.
When removing the battery, turn the power off.
When installing/removing the battery, make sure that moisture or dust particles do not come in
contact with the inside of the instrument.
Waterproofing property for this instrument is not secured unless the battery cover and external
interface hatch are closed, and the connector caps are correctly attached. Do not use it with these
open or loose, under the condition where water or other liquid spills over the instrument.
 Using the Battery adapter
Insert the BDC46C into the battery adapter.
1
Align the notch in the battery with the battery adapter as
shown at right. With the terminals-end of the battery
inserted, push until the battery adapter is fully extended.
Battery notch

•
Do not attach the battery adaptor in the wrong direction.
The battery cover could be damaged when inserting the
battery and closing the battery cover.
2
Slot the top end of the battery into the battery adapter.
The extendable portion of the battery adapter will
automatically retract and hold the battery in place.

•
•
To remove, grip both sides of the battery towards the terminals-end and pull out.
It is possible to charge the BDC46C without removing from the battery adapter.
 Mounting the battery
1
Remove the cover while pressing the buttons on both sides of
the battery cover.
Battery cover
14-2
14 POWER SOURCE AND CHARGING
2
Insert the battery with the arrow shown on it downward while
pressing toward the instrument.

•
Inserting the battery aslant may damage the instrument or the
battery terminal.
3
Close the cover. Listen for the click to ensure that the cover is
properly closed.
Battery
14-3
15 USING USB FLASH DRIVE
15
USING USB FLASH DRIVE
It is possible to read in/output data from/to a USB flash drive.
•
•
•
•
•
When using a USB flash drive, data is stored in the root directory. You cannot read/write data from/
to subdirectories.
When using the ES, an MS-DOS-compatible text file can be input/output.
You can neither save a file under the same name as a read-only file, nor change/delete the name of
a read-only file. (However, this varies depending on the model or software you are using.)
For "Communication Manual" that describes details on the communication formats used for
inputting/outputting data to/from a USB flash drive, please consult with your local dealer.
When using the ES, you can use a USB flash drive with the capacity of up to 8GB.
15.1 Inserting the USB flash drive

•
•
•
Do not remove the USB flash drive during data read/write. Doing so will cause data stored in the
USB flash drive or the ES to be lost.
Do not remove the battery or turn off the power during data read/write. Doing so will cause data
stored in the USB flash drive or the ES to be lost.
Waterproofing property for this instrument is not secured unless the battery cover and external
interface hatch are closed, and the connector caps are correctly attached. Do not use it with these
open or loose, under the condition where water or other liquid spills over the instrument.
 PROCEDURE
1
2
Slide the catch on the external interface hatch cover
down to open.
Insert the USB flash drive in the respective slot.

•
When using a USB memory with 4 metal terminals on
the surface, insert it with the terminal facing backwards
to avoid damaging the USB port.
3
Close the cover.
Listen for the click to ensure that the cover is properly
closed.
15-1
External
interface
hatch
16 DETACH/ATTACH OF TRIBRACH
16
DETACH/ATTACH OF TRIBRACH
The instrument is easily detached or attached to the tribrach, with a tribrach locking lever loosened or
tightened for this purpose.
 Detachment
1
2
Loosen the tribrach locking lever, by revolving it 180° or 200gon in the counterclockwise direction
(which will point the triangle mark upwards).
Grip the carrying handle firmly with one hand while holding the tribrach with the other. Then lift the
instrument straight upwards and off.
 Attachment
1
2
3
Hold the instrument by the carrying handle, with one hand, and carefully lower it on top of the
tribrach while, at the same time, coinciding the alignment piece with the tribrach alignment groove
on the instrument and tribrach respectively.
When fully seated, revolve the tribrach locking lever 180° or 200gon clockwise (which will point the
triangle mark downwards again).
Confirm that the upper instrument section is securely attached.
Alignment piece
Alignment groove
Securing screw
Tribrach locking lever
 Locking the Tribrach Locking Lever
The tribrach locking lever can be locked, to prevent it be accidentally removed, especially if the
upper instrument section is not being detached very often. Simply tighten the securing screw on the
locking lever with the accessory screwdriver, found in the case.
16-1
17 SELECTING MODE
17
SELECTING MODE
17.1 Items of the Selecting Mode
The following modes are available.
Menu
1:
UNIT SET
2:
MODE SET
Items
Selecting item
Display
TEMP. &
PRES.
°C / °F
hPa / mmHg /inHg
Select the unit of temperature for atmospheric
correction. Select the unit of air pressure for
atmospheric correction.
ANGLE
DEG(360°) /
GON(400G) /
MIL(6400M)
Choose degree, gon or mil unit for measuring
angle.
DISTANCE
m / ft / ft + in
Choose measuring unit for distance meter, feet or
feet and inch
FEET
US SURVEY /
INTERNATIONAL
Select the meter / feet conversion factor.
US SURVEY feet
1m = 3.280833333333333 ft.
INTERNATIONAL feet
1m = 3.280839895013123 ft.
POWER ON
MODE
ANGLE MEAS./
DISTANCE MEAS.
Select to set the measurement mode for angle or
distance when the power is turned on.
FINE/CRS/
TRK
FINE / COARSE /
TRACK
Select Fine /Coarse / Tracking mode in distance
measurement mode, when the power is turned
on.
HD&VD/SD
HD&VD /SD
Specify which is displayed first, horizontal and
vertical distance or slope distance, when the
power is turned on.
V ANGLE
Z0/H0
ZENITH 0 /
HORIZONTAL 0
Choose the vertical angle reading from zenith or
from level.
N-TIMES /
REPEAT
N-TIMES /REPEAT
Select the measurement mode for distance when
the power is turned on.
TIMES OF
MEAS.
0~99
Set N (number of times) for times of distance
measurement. When setting number of times as
1or 0, it is single measurement.
NEZ / ENZ
NEZ / ENZ
Select a coordinate displaying order either NEZ
or ENZ.
HA MEMORY
ON / OFF
Horizontal angle set can be retained after the
power is turned off.
ESC KEY
MODE
DATA COLLECT /
LAYOUT / REC /OFF
You can select a function of the {ESC} key.
DATA COLLECT / LAYOUT: It is possible to enter
data input mode (in DATA COLLECT) or Layout
Menu from normal measuring mode directly.
REC: While executing normal or offset
measuring, the measuring data can be output.
OFF: Returns to normal function.
COORD.
CHECK
ON / OFF
Select coordinate displaying ON or OFF when
setting a point.
FINE
READING
0.2mm/1mm
Select 1mm or 0.2mm for the minimum reading
unit in the distance mode (FINE mode).
* This mode is for switching output format unit
when using communication commands.
Regardless of this setting, minimum reading
unit of slope distance is always set to "1 mm"
and calculated.
17-1
17 SELECTING MODE
3:
OTHERS
SET
OFFSET V
ANG
FREE / HOLD
Select Vertical angle setting in the Angle Offset
measurement mode.
FREE: Vertical angle varies by the angle of the
telescope.
HOLD: Vertical angle is fixed even if the angle of
the telescope changes.
NON-PSM /
PRISM
NON-PRISM /
PRISM / SHEET
Select the distance measurement mode when
the power is turned ON.
H-ANGLE
BUZZER
ON / OFF
Specify whether the buzzer sounds or not for
every horizontal angle 90°.
S/A BUZZER
ON / OFF
Specify whether the buzzer sounds or not in the
set audio mode.
WCORRECTION
OFF / 0.14 / 0.20
Set correction for refraction and earth curvature,
coefficient of refraction as; K=0.14, K=0.20 or no
correction.
NEZ MEMORY
ON / OFF
It is possible to retain the coordinate of
instrument point, the instrument height and prism
height after power off.
REC TYPE
REC-A / REC-B
Select REC-A or REC-B for data output.
REC-A : The measurement is made again and
this new data is output.
REC-B : The data being displayed is output.
CR,LF
ON / OFF
It is possible to output the data with carriage
return and line feed.
NEZ REC
FORM
STANDARD /
with RAW /
STANDARD -12Dig /
with RAW - 12Dig
Select to record coordinates in standard or with
raw data.
MANUAL NEZ
REC
ON/ OFF
In the layout mode or data collect mode, it is
possible to record coordinates entered directly
from the keyboard.
ACK MODE
STANDARD /
OMITTED
Set the procedure of the communication with
external device.
STANDARD:Normal procedure
OMITTED: Even though the [ACK] is omitted
from the external device, the data is
not sent again.
GRID FACTOR
USE G.F. /
DON’T USE
Select using GRID FACTOR in calculation of
measurement data.
CUT & FILL
STANDARD /
CUT&FILL
In the layout mode, CUT & FILL can be displayed
instead of dZ.
CONTRAST
MENU
ON / OFF
When the instrument is turned ON, it is possible
to display the screen which you can adjust
contrast of the display and confirm the prism
constant (PSM), non-prism constant (NPM),
sheet constant (SHT) and atmospheric correction
value (PPM).
PASSWORD *1
ON / OFF
When the instrument is turned ON, the screen to
request the password will appear. *2
*1 Applicable only to the instruments with security function
*2 If you forget a password, the instrument needs repair to cancel the password. Please contact
Topcon or your local Topcon dealer.
17-2
17 SELECTING MODE
17.2 How to Set Selecting Mode
<Example>: Setting unit in hPa, °F, NEZ MEMORY:ON
Operating procedure
Operation
1 After pressing the {MENU} key, press the {F4}
{MENU}
{F4}
{F4}
(P↓) key twice to get the menu on page 3.
Display
MENU
3/4
F1:ILLUMINATION
F2:PARAMETERS 1
F3:PARAMETERS 2 P↓
2 Press the {F3} key.
{F3}
PARAMETERS 2
F1:UNIT SET
F2:MODE SET
F3:OTHERS SET
3 Press {F1} (UNIT SET) key.
{F1}
UNIT SET
1/2
F1:TEMP. & PRES.
F2:ANGLE
F3:DISTANCE
P↓
4 Press {F1} (TEMP. & PRES.) key.
{F1}
TEMP. & PRES. UNIT
TEMP. : °C
PRES. : mmHg
°C
°F ––– ENTER
{F2}
{F4}
TEMP. & PRES. UNIT
TEMP. : °F
PRES. : mmHg
hPa mmHg inHg ENTER
{F1}
{F4}
UNIT SET
1/2
F1:TEMP. & PRES.
F2:ANGLE
F3:DISTANCE
5 Press {F2} (°F) key, and press
{F4} (ENTER) key.
6 Press {F1} (hPa) key, and press {F4} (ENTER)
key.
Returns to unit set menu.
7 Press {ESC} key.
{ESC}
Returns to PARAMETERS 2 menu.
PARAMETERS 2
F1:UNIT SET
F2:MODE SET
F3:OTHERS SET
8 Press {F3} (OTHERS SET) key.
{F3}
OTHERS SET
1/5
F1:H-ANGLE BUZZER
F2:S/A BUZZER
F3:W-CORRECTION P↓
9 Press {F4} (P↓) key, to get the function in page 2.
{F4}
OTHERS SET
F1:NEZ MEMORY
F2:REC TYPE
F3:CR,LF
17-3
2/5
P↓
17 SELECTING MODE
10 Press {F1} key.
{F1}
NEZ MEMORY
[OFF]
[ON] [OFF] ––– ENTER
11 Press {F1} (ON) key, and press {F4} (ENTER)
{F1}
{F4}
key.
Returns to OTHERS SET menu.
17-4
OTHERS SET
F1:NEZ MEMORY
F2:REC TYPE
F3:CR,LF
2/5
P↓
18 CHECKS AND ADJUSTMENTS
18
CHECKS AND ADJUSTMENTS
A ES is a precision instrument that requires fine adjustments. It must be inspected and adjusted before
use so that it always performs accurate measurements.
• Always perform checking and adjustment in the proper sequence beginning from Section 18.1
“Circular Level” to 18.7 “Checking and Adjusting of Laser Plummet”.
• In addition, the instrument should be inspected with special care after it has been stored a long
time, transported, or when it may have been damaged by a strong shock.
• Make sure the instrument is securely set up and stable before performing checks and adjustments.
18.1 Circular Level
 PROCEDURE: Checking and adjusting
1
Level while checking the display.
X
see Section 2.5.2 “Levelling”.
X -3'20"
Y 3'40"

•
If the tilt sensor is misaligned, the circular level is not
adjusted correctly.
2
Check the position of the bubble of the circular level.
If the bubble is not off-center, no adjustment is necessary.
If the bubble is off-center, perform the following adjustment.
3
First confirm the off-center direction.
Use the hexagonal wrench (2.5mm) to loosen the circular
level adjustment screw on the side opposite to the direction
the bubble is displaced to move the bubble to the center.
4
Adjust the adjusting screws until the tightening tension of
the three screws is the same to align the bubble in the
middle of the circle.
EXIT

•
•
Be careful that the tightening tension is identical for all the adjusting screws.
Also, do not over-tighten the adjusting screws as this may damage the circular level.
18-1
Y
18 CHECKS AND ADJUSTMENTS
18.2 Adjustment of Vertical Angle 0 Datum
If when measuring the vertical angle of target A at telescope position normal (direct) and reverse
settings, the amount of normal and reverse measurements combined is other than 360° (ZENITH-0),
half of the difference from 360° is the error amount from corrected 0 setting. Carry out adjustment. As
adjustment for vertical angle 0 setting is the criteria for determining instrument coordinate origin, use
special care for adjustment.
Operating procedure
Operation
Display
1 Level the instrument properly with the
plate level.
2 While pressing the {F1} key, turn power switch
{F1}
+
Power ON
ON.
3 Press the {F1} key.
{F1}
ADJUSTMENT MODE
F1:V ANGLE 0 POINT
F2:V0 AXIS
P↓
V0 ADJUSTMENT
<STEP-1> FRONT
V:
90°00'00"
ENTER
4 Collimate target A from the telescope properly in
normal setting.
5 Press the {F4} (ENTER) key.
Collimate A
(Normal)
{F4}
6 Collimate target A in reverse telescope setting.
Collimate A
(Reverse)
7 Press the {F4} (ENTER) key.
Measured value is set and carry out normal angle
measurement.
V0 ADJUSTMENT
<STEP-2> REVERSE
V: 270°00'00"
ENTER
{F4}
<SET!>
V : 270°00'00"
HR: 120°30'40"
0SET
8 Check that the total amount of normal and reverse
angular travel is 360° collimating the target A by
normal and reverse positions.
18-2
HOLD
HSET P1↓
18 CHECKS AND ADJUSTMENTS
18.3 Adjustment of Compensation Systematic Error of Instrument
1 Vertical axis error
2 Collimation axis error
3 Vertical angle 0 datum error
Correction constants for the above errors are calculated and stored in the instrument by the following
procedure, and then measurement values are corrected using the stored constants. This adjustment
has a direct effect on determining the coordinate origin. Carry out the adjustment very carefully.
Operating procedure
Operation
1 Level the instrument properly with the
{F1}
+
Power ON
plate level.
2 While pressing the {F1} key, turn power switch
ON.
3 Press the {F2} key.
{F2}
4 Press the {F1} key.
{F1}
Display
ADJUSTMENT MODE
F1:V ANGLE 0 POINT
F2:V0 AXIS
P↓
AV0 AXIS
F1:MEASUREMENT
F2:CONSTANT LIST
V0/AXIS ADJUSTMENTS
(A)COLLIMATION
5 Collimate target A. (FACE (1)).
Collimate
A
(Normal)
FRONT FACE1
V:
89°55'50"
LEVEL ±0
/0
SET
6 Press the {F4} (SET) key. *1)
The sample display shows that the measurement
is made 5 times in FACE 1.
7 Turn the telescope in reverse telescope setting
{F4}
Turn
telescope
(FACE (2)).
8 Collimate target A.
Collimate
A
(Reverse)
9 Press the {F4} (SET) key.
Repeat the procedures in step 8 and 9 so that the
count of measured times matches to the one in
FACE (1). *2)
10 Press the {F4} (SET) key. Repeat the procedures
in step 13 and 14 so that the count of measured
times matches to the one in FACE(2).
Then the display returns to main menu.
18-3
REVERSE FACE2
V: 270°04'20"
LEVEL ±0
/5
SET
{F4}
{F4}
COMPLETE
18 CHECKS AND ADJUSTMENTS
 To show the constant list of systematic error of
instrument
1 Press the {F3} key from Adjustment Mode menu
1/2.
2 Press the {F2} key.
Correction values are displayed.
3 Press the {F1} key.
ADJUSTMENT MODE
F1:V ANGLE 0 POINT
F2:V0 AXIS
P↓
{F3}
V0 AXIS
F1:MEASUREMENT
F2:CONSTANT LIST
{F2}
VCo: 1°57'12"
HCo: -0°00'20"
HAx: -0°00'20"
EXIT
{F1}
The display returns to previous menu.
*1) It is able to get the average value from 1 to 10 measurements. To get the average, repeat the
procedures in steps 5, 6 or 10, 11. The measured times is counted in the second line of display.
*2) The compensation values of 1) Error of vertical axis (X,Y tilt sensor offset), 2) Collimation error, and 3)
Error of vertical angle 0datum will be set and memorized internally.
18-4
18 CHECKS AND ADJUSTMENTS
18.4 Reticle
 Check 1: Perpendicularity of the reticle to the horizontal axis
1) Carefully level the instrument.
2) Align a clearly visible target (the edge of a roof for example)
on point A of the reticle line.
3) Use the telescope fine motion screw to align the target to
point B on a vertical line.
If the target moves parallel to the vertical line, adjustment is
unnecessary. If its movement deviates from the vertical line,
have our service representative adjust it.
 Check 2: Vertical and horizontal reticle line positions

•
•
Perform check in weak sunlight and no scintillation.
"Tilt crn" should be se to "Yes (H,V)" and "coll.crn" to "Yes" in <Obs. condition> while performing
checks.
1) Carefully level the instrument.
2) Install a target at a point about 100m in the horizontal
direction from the instrument.
3) While the observation screen is displayed and the
telescope is in Face 1, sight the center of the target
correctly and read out the horizontal angle A1 and the
vertical angle B1.
Example:
Horizontal angle A1 =18° 34' 00"
Vertical angle B1 =90° 30' 20"
4) While the telescope is in Face 2, sight the center of the
target correctly and read out the horizontal angle A2 and
the vertical angle B2.
Example:
Horizontal angle A2 =198° 34' 20"
Vertical angle B2 =269° 30' 00"
18-5
18 CHECKS AND ADJUSTMENTS
5) Do the calculations:
A2-A1 and B2+B1
If A2-A1 is within 180°±20″and B2(B1 is within 360°±40″,
adjustment is unnecessary.
Example:
A2-A1 (Horizontal angle) =198° 34' 20"- 18° 34' 00"
=180° 00' 20"
B2-B1 (Vertical angle)
=269° 30' 00" + 90° 30' 20"
=360° 00' 20"
If the difference is large even after repeating the check 2 or
3 times, make sure that checking and adjusting of Section
18.2 “Adjustment of Vertical Angle 0 Datum” and
“Adjustment of Compensation Systematic Error of
Instrument” are completed.
If the results remain the same, have our service
representative perform the adjustment.
18.5 Optical Plummet
 Checking
1) Carefully level the ES and exactly center a survey point in
the reticle of the optical plummet.
2) Turn the upper part 180° and check the position of the
survey point in the reticle.
If the surveying point is still centered, no adjustment is
necessary.
If the surveying point is not still centered in the optical
plummet, adjust as follows:
 Adjusting
3) Correct half the deviation with the levelling foot screw.
4) Firmly hold down the top portion of the instrument, and
remove the optical plummet knob cover, then remove the
optical plummet reticle cover on the inside.
Replace the optical plummet knob cover.
Use the 4 adjusting screws of the optical plummet to adjust
the remaining half of the deviation as show below.
18-6
Optical plummet
reticle cover
Optical
plummet
knob cover
18 CHECKS AND ADJUSTMENTS
5) When the survey point is on the lower (upper) part of the
illustration:
1. Loosen the upper (lower) screw slightly.
2. Tighten the lower (upper) screw by the same amount.
1 (2)
2 (1)
6) If the survey point is on the solid line (dotted line):
3. Loosen the right (left) screw slightly.
4. Tighten the left (right) screw by the same amount.
4
(3)
3
(4)
7) Check the adjustment by rotating the upper part of the
instrument. The survey point should remain centered in the
reticle. If necessary, repeat the adjustment.
8) Remove the optical plummet knob cover, and install the
optical plummet reticle cover on the inside.
Replace the optical plummet knob cover.

•
Do not over-tighten the 4 adjusting screws as this may cause the reticle to go out of adjustment.
18.6 Additive Distance Constant
The additive distance constant K of the ES is adjusted to 0 before delivery. Although it almost never
deviates, use a baseline with a known distance precision to check that the additive distance constant K
is close to 0 several times a year and whenever the values measured by the instrument begin to
deviate by a consistent amount. Perform these checks as follows.

•
•
Errors in setting up the instrument and reflective prism or in sighting the target will influence the
additive distance constant. Be extremely careful to prevent such errors when performing these
procedures.
Set up so that the instrument height and the target height are identical. If a flat place is not
available, use an automatic level to make sure the heights are identical.
 Checking
1) Find an area of flat ground where two points 100m apart
can be selected.
Set up the Instrument at point A and the reflective prism at
point B. Establish a point C half way between points A and
B.
2) Precisely measure the horizontal distance between point A
and point B 10 times and calculate the average value.
18-7
18 CHECKS AND ADJUSTMENTS
3) Place the ES at point C directly between points A and B and
set up the reflective prism at point A.
4) Precisely measure the horizontal distances CA and CB 10
times each and calculate the average value for each
distance.
5) Calculate the additive distance constant K as follows.
K = AB - (CA+CB)
6) Repeat steps 1 to 5 two or three times.
If the additive distance constant K is within ±3mm even
once, adjustment is unnecessary.
If it always exceeds this range, have our service
representative perform an adjustment.
18.7 Checking and Adjusting of Laser Plummet
Checks and adjustments are performed using an adjustment target (cut out and use targets printed at
the back of this manual). As this target is made of paper great care must be taken to prevent it getting
wet.
 Checking
1) Level the instrument and emit the laser plummet beam.
 see Section 2.5.2 “Levelling”.
2) Rotate the upper part horizontally and place a target so that
it is aligned with the center of the circle created by the
rotating laser plummet beam.
•
•
•
Laser beam remains centered on the center of the
target – No adjustment necessary
Laser beam strays from the center of the target –
Adjustment necessary.
Laser beam draws a circle outside the target circle –
Contact your local dealer.
 Adjusting
1) Turn the laser plummet adjustment cap anticlockwise and
remove.
2) Emit the laser plummet beam.
3) Note the current position (x) of the laser beam.
18-8
5mm
18 CHECKS AND ADJUSTMENTS
4) Turn the upper part of the instrument horizontally through
180° and note the new position (y) of the laser beam.
Adjustment will bring the laser beam to a point midway
along a line drawn between these two positions.
x
Desired final position
y
5) Check the position of the desired final position. Place a
target so that its center is aligned with the desired final
position.
The remaining deviation will be adjusted using the 4 fine
adjustment screws.

•
•
Be extremely careful to adjust all the fine adjustment screws
by the same amount so that none will be over-tightened.
Turn screws clockwise to tighten.
Target
Fine adjustment screws
6) When the laser beam is on the upper (lower) part of Fig. A
the up/down adjustment is made as follows:
a. Insert the provided hexagon key wrench into both the upper
and lower screws.
Desired final position
Fig. A
b. Slightly loosen the upper (lower) screw and tighten the
lower (upper) screw. Make sure that the tightening
tension for both screws is identical. Continue to adjust
until the laser beam is on the horizontal line of the target.
7) When the laser beam is in the right (left) part of Fig. B the
left (right) adjustment is made as follows:
a. Insert a hexagon key wrench into both the left and right
screws.
b. Slightly loosen the right (left) screw and tighten the left (right)
screw. Make sure that the tightening tension for both screws
is identical.
Continue to adjust until the laser beam is aligned with the
target center.
8) Turn the upper part of the instrument horizontally and check
that the laser beam is now aligned with the target center.
9) Re-attach the laser plummet adjustment cap.
18-9
Fig. B
18 CHECKS AND ADJUSTMENTS

•
Tightening each of the fine adjustment screws moves the laser plummet beam in the directions
shown below.
Up
Tighten "Up" screw
Left
Right
Tighten "Right"
screw
Tighten "Left"
screw
Tighten "Down" screw
Down
Fine adjustment screws
Laser plummet adjustment cap
pointing towards user
18-10
19 TOP FIELD MODE
19
TOP FIELD MODE
19.1 MAIN MENU (Major Functions)
MENU
1/4
F1:TOP FIELD
F2:DATA COLLECT
F3:LAYOUT
P↓
1.JOB [
]
{F1} 2.SETTING
3.GO TO WORK
[1] [2] [3]
1.JOB•••
{F1} Performs process
related to JOB
management
↓
2.SETTING•••
{F2} Configures setting
for distance unit
and mode
{F4}
3.GO TO WORK•••
{F3} Performs occupied
point setting and
LAYOUT process
4.DATA MANAGER
{F1}
↑
[4]
4.DATA MANAGER•••
Performs coordinate
data reference and
addition processing
19.2 JOB

•
When a job is created, a measurement/coordinates data file with the same job name will be created
in the internal memory. If there is another file with the same name, the existing data file will be used
for the job.
19.2.1To Create New Job
Operating procedure
Operation
1 Select {F1} (TOP FIELD) from the menu.
{MENU}
{F1}
2 Select {F1} (JOB).
{F1}
3 Select {F2} (CREATE NEW JOB).
{F2}
4 Enter job name.
Enter job
name
 10 letters maximum
5 Press {ENT} key to create a new job.
{ENT}
 If there is another job with the same name, the
existing job will be selected.
 A maximum of 15 job files can be registered.
19-1
Display
1.JOB [
2.SETTING
3.GO TO WORK
[1] [2] [3]
]
↓
1.OPEN JOB FILE
2.CREATE NEW JOB
3.NO JOB FILE
[1] [2] [3]
↓
ENTER JOB FILE
[_
]
ALP
CLR
ENTER JOB FILE
[JOB1_
]
ALP
CLR
1.JOB [JOB1
2.SETTING
3.GO TO WORK
[1] [2] [3]
]
↓
19 TOP FIELD MODE
19.2.2To Select Existing Job
Operating procedure
Operation
1 Select {F1} (TOP FIELD) from the menu.
{MENU}
{F1}
2 Select {F1} (JOB).
{F1}
3 Select {F1} (OPEN JOB FILE).
{F1}
Display
1.JOB [
2.SETTING
3.GO TO WORK
[1] [2] [3]
{F1}
or
{F2}
(Arrow) key, or enter a job name.
↓
SELECT JOB FILE
[_
]
↓
ALP
CLR
SELECT JOB FILE
[JOB1_
Enter job
name
5 Press {ENT} key to select job.
↓
1.OPEN JOB FILE
2.CREATE NEW JOB
3.NO JOB FILE
[1] [2] [3]
↑
4 Select an existing job name with {F1} or {F2}
]
{ENT}
↑
↓
]
ALP
CLR
1.JOB [JOB1
2.SETTING
3.GO TO WORK
[1] [2] [3]
]
↓
 When the job is selected, the job name will be displayed at the top right of TOP FIELD of the main
menu.
1.JOB [JOB1
2.SETTING
3.GO TO WORK
[1] [2] [3]
]
↓
19.2.3To Delete Job
Operating procedure
Operation
1 Select {F1} (TOP FIELD) from the menu.
{MENU}
{F1}
2 Select {F1} (JOB).
3 Select {F4} (↓) to move to the second page of the
{F1}, {F4}
Display
1.JOB [
2.SETTING
3.GO TO WORK
[1] [2] [3]
]
↓
4.DELETE JOB FILE
JOB menu.
↓
[4]
4 Select {F1} (DELETE JOB FILE).
{F1}
SELECT JOB TO DEL
[_
]
↑
19-2
↓
ALP
CLR
19 TOP FIELD MODE
5 Select an existing job name with {F1} or {F2}
Enter/
Select job
name
(Arrow) key, or enter a job name.
SELECT JOB TO DEL
[JOB1_
]
↑
6 Press {ENT} key.
{ENT}
{F3}
ALP
CLR
SELECT JOB TO DEL
[JOB1_
]
>OK ?
7 Pressing {F3} (YES) key will delete the job file.
↓
[YES][NO]
4.DELETE JOB FILE
↓
[4]
19.2.4When Job is not to be Used
Job selection can be canceled if the job is not to be used and coordinate data is not to be recorded.
Operating procedure
Operation
1 Select {F1} (TOP FIELD) from the menu.
{MENU}
{F1}
2 Select {F1} (JOB).
{F1}
3 Job selection will be cancelled when {F3} (NO
Display
1.JOB [JOB1
2.SETTING
3.GO TO WORK
[1] [2] [3]
1.OPEN JOB FILE
2.CREATE NEW JOB
3.NO JOB FILE
[1] [2] [3]
]
↓
↓
{F3}
JOB FILE) is selected.
<SET!>
19.3 SETTING
Operating procedure
Operation
1 Select {F1} (TOP FIELD) from the menu.
{MENU}
{F1}
Display
1.JOB [
2.SETTING
3.GO TO WORK
[1] [2] [3]
2 Select {F2} (SETTING).
{F2}
DIST UNITS :FT-10
COORDINATES :XYZ
EDM MODE
:FINE
OK EDIT
3 To change the setting, select {F2} (EDIT).
{F2}
1.US FEET-10THE
2.US FEET-INCHES
3.METERS
[1] [2] [3]
 To not change the setting, select {F1} (OK).
19-3
]
↓
19 TOP FIELD MODE
4 Select {F1} to {F3} to set the unit of distance.
Select
{F1} ~ {F3}
{F1} (US FEET-10THE): Display in feet
{F2} (US FEET-INCHES): Display in feet and
inches
{F3} (METERS): Display in meters
5 Select {F1} to {F3} to set the display sequence of
coordinates.
measurement mode.
1.FINE
2.CRS-1mm
3.CRS-10mm
[1] [2] [3]
Select
{F1} ~ {F3}
DIST UNITS :METERS
COORDINATES :NEZ
EDM MODE
:CRS-10
OK EDIT
{F1} (FINE): FINE mode
{F2} (CRS-1mm): COARSE mode (Rounding in
the unit of 1mm)
{F3} (CRS-10mm): COARSE mode (Rounding in
the unit of 10mm)
7 Press {F1} (OK) to set.
[3]
Select
{F1} ~ {F3}
{F1} (N,E,Z): Display N, E, Z
{F2} (E,N,Z): Display E, N, Z
{F3} (X,Y,Z): Display X, Y, Z
6 Select {F1} ~ {F3} to set the distance
1.N,E,Z
2.E,N,Z
3.X,Y,Z
[1] [2]
{F1}
1.JOB [
2.SETTING
3.GO TO WORK
[1] [2] [3]
19.4 GO TO WORK
The following operations are performed with GO TO WORK.
1) Setting of occupied point and backsight
••••••INST SETUP
2) Layout
••••••LAYOUT
3) Ordinary measuring and coordinate saving
••••••TOPO
1.JOB [JOB1
2.SETTING
3.GO TO WORK
[1] [2] [3]
]
{F3}
↓
1.INST SETUP
2.LAYOUT
3.TOPO
[1] [2] [3]
19.4.1To Set Occupied Point and Backsight
To set occupied point
 Selecting from existing coordinate data
Operating procedure
Operation
Display
1.INST SETUP
2.LAYOUT
3.TOPO
[1] [2] [3]
1 Select {F1} (INST SETUP).
{F1}
19-4
1.SELECT INST PT
2.CREATE INST PT
3.MEAS KNWN PTS
[1] [2] [3]
]
↓
19 TOP FIELD MODE
2 Select {F1} (SELECT INST PT).
{F1}
ENTER INST PT
PT#:
[
↑
3 Select an existing coordinate point with {F1} or
Enter/
Select PT#
{F2} (Arrow) key, or directly enter a coordinate
point.
ALP
CLR
ENTER INST PT
PT#:
[OCC-PT
]
↑
4 Set with {ENT} key.
{ENT}
5 Enter an instrument height.
6 Set with {ENT} key.
↓
↓
ALP
CLR
ENTER INST HT
INST HT
=0.000_
Enter
instrument
height
ENTER INST HT
INST HT
=1.500_
{ENT}
1.SELECT BS PT
2.CREATE BS PT
3.BS DIRECTION
[1] [2] [3]
 Then, the procedure will move onto backsight
setting.
]
m
CLR
m
CLR
 Setting by entering the coordinate data of a occupied point directly
Operating procedure
Operation
Display
1.INST SETUP
2.LAYOUT
3.TOPO
[1] [2] [3]
1 Select {F1} (INST SETUP).
{F1}
1.SELECT INST PT
2.CREATE INST PT
3.MEAS KNWN PTS
[1] [2] [3]
2 Select {F2} (CREATE INST PT).
{F2}
ENTER NEW POINT:
PT#:
[_
]
DESC: [
]
ALP CLR
Enter PT#,
Enter
DESC
ENTER NEW POINT:
PT#:
[OCC
]
DESC: [POINT_
]
ALP CLR
3 Enter the coordinate point of a occupied point and
its description.
4 Set with {ENT} key.
{ENT}
N [
E [
Z [
ALP
19-5
]
]
]
CLR
19 TOP FIELD MODE
5 Enter occupied point coordinates (N, E, Z).
Enter occupied point
coordinate
N [0.000
E [0.000
Z [0.000
ALP
6 Set with {ENT} key.
{ENT}
7 Enter an instrument height.
8 Set with {ENT} key.
ENTER INST HT
INST HT
=0.000_
Enter
instrument
height
ENTER INST HT
INST HT
=1.500_
{ENT}
1.SELECT BS PT
2.CREATE BS PT
3.BS DIRECTION
[1] [2] [3]
 Then, the procedure will move onto backsight
setting.
]
]
]
CLR
m
CLR
m
CLR
 Seeking an occupied point from existing coordinate data
Operating procedure
Operation
Display
1.INST SETUP
2.LAYOUT
3.TOPO
[1] [2] [3]
1 Select {F1} (INST SETUP).
{F1}
1.SELECT INST PT
2.CREATE INST PT
3.MEAS KNWN PTS
[1] [2] [3]
2 Select {F3} (MEAS KNWN PTS).
{F3}
ENTER INST HT
INST HT
=0.000_
3 Enter an instrument height.
Enter
instrument
height
4 Set with {ENT} key.
{ENT}
ENTER INST HT
INST HT
=1.500_
m
CLR
m
CLR
ENTER # REF PTS
# REF PTS: =
CLR
5 Enter point number to collimate.
Enter collimate point
number
 Collimate point number: 2 to 7 points
ENTER # REF PTS
# REF PTS: = 2
CLR
6 Set with {ENT}.
{ENT}
19-6
ENTER TARGET HT
HT OF ROD
=0.000_
m
CLR
19 TOP FIELD MODE
7 Enter a reflector height.
Enter
reflector
height
8 Set with {ENT} key.
{ENT}
ENTER TARGET HT
HT OF ROD
=1.500_
ENTER TARGET PT# 1/2
PT#:
[_
]
↑
9 Select the coordinate point of a collimate point
Enter/
Select PT#
with {F1} or {F2} (Arrow) key, or enter the
coordinate point directly. *1)
{ENT}
11 Collimate prism and press {F1} (MSR) key.
{F1}
Begin measurement.
12 When the prism measurement is completed,
↓
ALP
CLR
ENTER TARGET PT# 1/2
PT#:
[PT-01_
]
↑
10 Set with {ENT} key.
m
CLR
↓
ALP
MEAS POINT
PT#:
[PT-01
HD:
MSR CHK
HR
CLR
1/2
]
m
MEAS POINT
1/2
PT#:
[PT-01
]
HD*
<<< m
>Measuring...
ENTER TARGET PT# 2/2
PT#:
[PT-01_
]
perform measurement for the next collimate point.
 Follow the same procedure.
↑
↓
ALP
CLR
MEAS POINT
2/2
PT#:
[PT-01
]
HD*
<<< m
>Measuring...
After the prism is measured the set number of
times, the occupied point coordinates will be
calculated and the standard deviation will be
displayed.
dN:
dE:
dZ:
OK
13 Press {F1} (OK).
The screen for inputting the coordinate point of an
occupied point and its description will be
displayed.
14 Enter the coordinate point of an occupied point
and its description.
19-7
0000.00 mm
0000.00 mm
0000.00 mm
NO
{F1}
ENTER NEW POINT:
PT#:
[_
]
DESC: [
]
ALP CLR
Enter PT#,
Enter
DESC
ENTER NEW POINT:
PT#:
[OCC
]
DESC: [POINT_
]
ALP CLR
19 TOP FIELD MODE
15 Set with {ENT} key.
{ENT}
POINT X SET!
ORIENTATION SET!
OK
16 When you press {F1} (OK), an occupied point and
{F1}
backsight will be set and the procedure will be
completed.
 The backsight is set up based on the previously
collimated prism position. Therefore, always press
{OK} under the condition in which the previous
prism backsight collimated.
NEZ
1.INST SETUP
2.LAYOUT
3.TOPO
[1] [2] [3]
 Checking collimate point coordinates during prism collimation
Operating procedure
Operation
1 To check the collimate point coordinates during
{F2}
prism collimation, select {F2} (CHK) key.
Display
MEAS POINT
PT#:
[PT-01
MSR
CHK
N [
E [
Z [
1/2
]
HR
10.000 ]
20.000 ]
0.000 ]
ENTER
 Checking prism height during prism collimation
Operating procedure
Operation
1 To check the prism height during prism collimation,
{F3}
select {F3} (HR) key.
Display
MEAS POINT
PT#:
[PT-01
MSR
CHK
1/2
]
HR
ENTER TARGET HT
HT OF ROD
=1.500_
m
CLR
 Checking occupied point coordinates during occupied point/backsight setting
Operating procedure
Operation
1 To check the occupied point coordinates during
occupied point/backsight setting, select {F2}
(NEZ) key.
{F2}
Display
POINT X SET!
ORIENTATION SET!
OK
N [
E [
Z [
NEZ
0.000 ]
0.000 ]
0.000 ]
ENTER
To set backsight
After completing the occupied point setting, the display for backsight setting will be displayed.
19-8
19 TOP FIELD MODE
 Setting from existing coordinate data
Operating procedure
Operation
 When the occupied point setting is completed,
this menu screen will be displayed.
1 Select {F1} (SELECT BS PT).
Display
1.SELECT BS PT
2.CREATE BS PT
3.BS DIRECTION
[1] [2] [3]
{F1}
ENTER BS POINT
PT#:
[
↑
2 Select an existing coordinate point with {F1} or
Enter/
Select PT#
{F2} (Arrow) key, or enter a coordinate point
directly.
ALP
CLR
ENTER BS POINT
PT#:
[BS-PT_
]
↑
3 Set with {ENT} key.
{ENT}
4 Enter a reflector height.
5 Set with {ENT} key.
↓
↓
ALP
ENTER BS HEIGHT
BS HT
=0.000_
Enter
reflector
height
ENTER BS HEIGHT
BS HT
=1.500_
{ENT}
SIGHT BS TARGET
1.MEAS ANG+DIST
2.MEAS ANG ONLY
6 Measure collimate point to set up backsight.
BS DIST CHECK
dDIST
=
MSR
To measuring distance, and to seek deviation with
missing line distance calculated from coordinate
data, select {F1} (MEAS ANG + DIST); and to set
up only the angle, select {F2} (MEAS ANG ONLY).
]
CLR
m
CLR
m
CLR
m
OK
 For example, select {F1}
7 Select {F1} (MSR). The distance to collimate point
will be measured and the difference to the
distance sought from coordinate data will be
displayed.
8 Pressing {F4} (OK) will complete the backsight
setting.
19-9
{F1}
BS DIST CHECK
dDIST
=
0.000 m
MSR
OK
{F4}
1.INST SETUP
2.LAYOUT
3.TOPO
[1] [2] [3]
19 TOP FIELD MODE
 Setting by entering the coordinate data of a collimate point directly
Operating procedure
Operation
 After the occupied point setting is completed,
this menu will be displayed.
Display
1.SELECT BS PT
2.CREATE BS PT
3.BS DIRECTION
[1] [2] [3]
1 Select {F2} (CREATE BS PT).
{F2}
1.INPUT PT
2.MEAS PT
[1]
2 Select {F1} (INPUT PT).
3 Enter the coordinate point of a collimate point and
its description.
4 Set with {ENT} key.
{F1}
ENTER NEW POINT:
PT#:
[_
]
DESC: [
]
ALP CLR
Enter PT #,
Enter
DESC
ENTER NEW POINT:
PT#:
[BS
]
DESC: [POINT_
]
ALP CLR
{ENT}
5 Enter collimate point coordinates (N, E, Z).
Enter collimate point
coordiante
6 Set with {ENT} key.
{ENT}
7 Enter a reflector height.
8 Set with {ENT} key.
9 From here to the backsight setting, follow the
same procedure to set backsight from existing
coordinate data.
19-10
[2]
N [
E [
Z [
ALP
]
]
]
CLR
ALP
]
]
]
CLR
N [10.000
E [10.000
Z [0.000
ENTER BS HEIGHT
BS HT
=0.000_
Enter
reflector
height
ENTER BS HEIGHT
BS HT
=1.500_
{ENT}
SIGHT BS TARGET
1.MEAS ANG+DIST
2.MEAS ANG ONLY
m
CLR
m
CLR
19 TOP FIELD MODE
 Using an existing horizontal angle and saving the coordinate data of the collimate point
Operating procedure
Operation
 After the occupied point setting is completed,
this menu will be displayed.
Display
1.SELECT BS PT
2.CREATE BS PT
3.BS DIRECTION
[1] [2] [3]
1 Select {F2} (CREATE BS PT).
{F2}
1.INPUT PT
2.MEAS PT
[1]
2 Select {F2} (MEAS PT).
3 Enter the coordinate point of a collimate point and
its description to record.
4 Set with {ENT} key.
{F2}
ENTER NEW POINT:
PT#:
[_
]
DESC: [
]
ALP CLR
Enter PT #,
Enter
DESC
ENTER NEW POINT:
PT#:
[BS
]
DESC: [POINT_
]
ALP CLR
{ENT}
5 Enter a reflector height.
6 Set with {ENT} key.
[2]
ENTER BS HEIGHT
BS HT
=0.000_
Enter
reflector
height
ENTER BS HEIGHT
BS HT
=1.500_
{ENT}
SIGHT BS TARGET
HD:
MSR
7 Collimate the reflector and press {F1} (MSR) key
to begin measurement.
{F1}
m
CLR
m
CLR
m
SIGHT BS TARGET
HD*
<<< m
>Measuring...
8 After measuring the reflector, record the
1.INST SETUP
2.LAYOUT
3.TOPO
[1] [2] [3]
coordinate data to complete the setting.
 Setting by entering backsight directly
Operating procedure
Operation
 After the occupied point setting is completed,
this menu will be displayed.
Display
1.SELECT BS PT
2.CREATE BS PT
3.BS DIRECTION
[1] [2] [3]
19-11
19 TOP FIELD MODE
1 Select {F3} (BS DIRECTION).
{F3}
2 Enter a backsight directly.
Enter
backsight
Pressing {F1} (0SET) will enter 0.
3 Set with {ENT} key.
{ENT}
ENTER BS ANGLE
BS AN[_
DDD.MMSS
0SET
ENTER BS ANGLE
BS AN[0.0000_
DDD.MMSS
0SET
{F3}
Set backsight to end.
19-12
CLR
]
CLR
SIGHT BS TARGET
>OK ?
4 Collimate the reflector and press {F3} (YES).
]
[YES][NO]
1.INST SETUP
2.LAYOUT
3.TOPO
[1] [2] [3]
19 TOP FIELD MODE
19.4.2To Layout
Operating procedure
Operation
Display
1.INST SETUP
2.LAYOUT
3.TOPO
[1] [2] [3]
1 Select {F2} (LAYOUT).
{F2}
2 Enter a reflector height.
Enter
reflector
height
3 Set with {ENT} key.
4 Select a coordinate point to layout with {F1} or
{F2} (Arrow) key, or enter a coordinate point
directly.
5 Set with {ENT} key. The data displayed will be
Line 1: Horizontal angle to layout point
(Difference)
Line 2: Cross directional distance to layout point
(Difference)
Line 3: Vertical distance to layout point
(Difference)
6 Pressing {F1} (MSR) will perform distance
measurement and it will also display the distance
difference.
difference in the horizontal direction, instead of the
difference in the horizontal angle.
Line 1: Horizontal distance to layout point
(Difference)
Line 2: Cross directional distance to layout point
(Difference)
Line 3: Vertical distance to layout point
(Difference)
19-13
ENTER TARGET HT
HT OF ROD
=1.500_
m
CLR
m
CLR
{ENT}
ENTER LAYOUT POINT#
PT#:
[_
]
DESC: [
]
↑
↓
ALP CLR
Enter/
Select PT#
ENTER LAYOUT POINT#
PT#:
[P01_
]
DESC: [
]
↑
↓
ALP CLR
{ENT}
dHA:
IN :
CUT:
MSR
R/L
{F1}
dHA:
IN :
CUT:
MSR
45°00'00"
2.500 m
0.010 m
R/L REC NEXT
{F2}
R :
IN :
CUT:
MSR
1.250 m
2.500 m
0.010 m
REC NEXT
 Data is updated each time (MSR) is performed.
7 Pressing {F2} (R/L) key will display distance
ENTER TARGET HT
HT OF ROD
=0.000_
45°00'00"
NEZ
REC
m
m
NEXT
19 TOP FIELD MODE
8 Pressing {F2} (NEZ) key will display coordinate
data.
Line 1: N coordinate (E coordinate)
Line 2: E coordinate (N coordinate)
Line 3: Z coordinate
 Pressing {F2} (dHA) will return to the angle
difference display.
9 Press {F3} (REC) key to record the data and move
to layout for the next point, and press {F4} (NEXT)
key to move to layout for the next point without
saving the data.
The number in the coordinate point will
automatically be incremented.
{F2}
{F3}
or
{F4}
N :
E :
Z :
MSR
dHA
1.250 m
2.500 m
0.010 m
REC NEXT
ENTER LAYOUT POINT#
PT#:
[P02_
]
DESC: [
]
↑
↓
ALP CLR
19.4.3To Conduct Ordinary Measurement and to Record Coordinates
Operating procedure
Operation
Display
1.INST SETUP
2.LAYOUT
3.TOPO
[1] [2] [3]
1 Select {F3} (TOPO).
{F3}
2 Enter the coordinate point and its description to
record. * 1)
3 Set with {ENT} key. * 2)
4 To record the coordinate data without checking
measured data, select {F1} (FAST) key.
5 The measured coordinate data will be recorded,
and the number in the coordinate point will
automatically be incremented.
6 To record the coordinate data while checking
7 Measure with {F1} (MSR) key.
PT#:
[P01
]
DESC: [POINT
]
HT ROD:
1.500 m
HR
ALP CLR
{ENT}
PT#:
[P01
]
DESC: [POINT
]
HT ROD:
1.500 m
FAST EDIT
HR MSR
{F1}
PT#:
[P01
]
DESC: [POINT
]
HT ROD:
1.500 m
>Measuring...
Save data
PT#:
[P02
]
DESC: [POINT
]
HT ROD:
1.500 m
FAST EDIT
HR MSR
{F1}
19-14
]
]
1.500 m
ALP CLR
Enter PT#,
Enter
DESC
{F4}
measured data, select {F4} (MSR) key.
PT#:
[
DESC: [
HT ROD:
HR
VA:
HA:
HD:
MSR
90°00'00"
120°00'00"
SD
VA:
HA:
HD:
MSR
60°00'00"
120°00'00"
10.000 m
SD
NEZ REC
NEZ
m
REC
19 TOP FIELD MODE
8 Pressing {F2} (SD) key will switch the distance
display to the SD display.
9 Pressing {F3} (NEZ) key will switch to the
coordinate display.
10 Pressing {F3} (A/D) key will switch to the
previously measured angle/measured distance
display.
11 Pressing {F4} (REC) key will record the data.
{F2}
VA:
HA:
HD:
MSR
60°00'00"
120°00'00"
11.547 m
HD
NEZ REC
{F3}
N :
E :
Z :
MSR
HD
-5.000 m
8.660 m
5.774 m
NEZ REC
VA:
HA:
HD:
MSR
60°00'00"
120°00'00"
11.547 m
HD
NEZ REC
{F3}
{F4}
 Data to be recorded are recalculated from the
currently displayed angle and horizontal distance
(angle offset function).
PT#:
[P02
]
DESC: [POINT
]
HT ROD:
1.500 m
FAST EDIT
HR MSR
To record the coordinate data of the collimate
point, record (REC) them without moving the angle
after measurement (MSR).
*1) To change the reflector height, select {F2} (HR) key to switch to the screen for reflector height input.
PT#:
[P01
]
DESC: [POINT
]
HT ROD:
1.500 m
HR
ALP CLR
{F2}
ENTER TARGET HT
HT OF ROD
=1.500_
m
CLR
*2) To edit a coordinate point and its description, select {F2} (EDIT) key to return to the editing mode.
PT#:
[P01
]
DESC: [POINT
]
HT ROD:
1.500 m
FAST EDIT
HR MSR
{F2}
19-15
PT#:
[P01_
]
DESC: [POINT
]
HT ROD:
1.500 m
HR
ALP CLR
19 TOP FIELD MODE
19.5 DATA MANAGER
The following operations can be performed with DATA MANAGER.
1) Adding coordinate data
••••••ADD POINT
2) Deleting coordinate data
••••••DELETE POINT
3) Viewing coordinate data
••••••VIEW POINT
4) Editing coordinate data
••••••EDIT POINT
5) Transferring coordinate data
••••••DATA TRANSFER
4.DATA MANAGER
[4]
{F1}
↑
1.ADD POINT
2.DELETE POINT
3.VIEW POINT
[1] [2] [3]
↓
{F4}
4.EDIT POINT
5.DATA TRANSFER
[4]
↑
[5]
19.5.1To Add Coordinate Data To Add Coordinate Data
Operating procedure
Operation
Display
1.ADD POINT
2.DELETE POINT
3.VIEW POINT
[1] [2] [3]
Select {F1} (ADD POINT).
Coordinates can be added through the following
procedure:
1. COORDINATES
2. REFLINE
3. TAPE
{F1}
↓
1.COORDINATES
2.REFLINE
3.TAPE
[1] [2] [3]
 Entering coordinates directly (COORDINATES)
Operating procedure
Operation
Display
1.COORDINATES
2.REFLINE
3.TAPE
[1] [2] [3]
1 Select {F1} (COORDINATES).
2 Enter a coordinate point and its description.
3 Set with {ENT} key.
{F1}
ENTER NEW POINT:
PT#:
[_
]
DESC: [
]
ALP CLR
Enter PT#,
Enter
DESC
ENTER NEW POINT:
PT#:
[P01
]
DESC: [POINT_
]
ALP CLR
{ENT}
19-16
N [_
E [
Z [
]
]
]
CLR
19 TOP FIELD MODE
4 Enter N/E/Z coordinates.
Enter NEZ
Coordinate
Data
5 Set with {ENT} key.
The coordinate point and the job name will be
displayed and the procedure will be completed.
{ENT}
N [0.000
E [0.000
Z [0.000_
PT#:
]
]
]
CLR
[P01
STORED!
[JOB1
JOB
]
]
1.COORDINATES
2.REFLINE
3.TAPE
[1] [2] [3]
 REFLINE
REF2
OFFSET
ADD POINT
DISTANCE
REF1
Operating procedure
Operation
Display
1.COORDINATES
2.REFLINE
3.TAPE
[1] [2] [3]
1 Select {F2} (REFLINE).
{F2}
ENTER REF1
PT#:
[_
DESC:
↑
2 To acquire coordinate data for reference "REF1,"
select an existing coordinate point with {F1} or
{F2} (Arrow) key, or enter a coordinate point
directly.
3 Set with {ENT} key.
Enter/
Select PT#
{ENT}
ALP
ENTER REF1
PT#:
[P01_
DESC:
↑
↓
ALP
ENTER REF2
PT#:
[_
DESC:
↑
19-17
↓
]
↓
CLR
]
CLR
]
ALP
CLR
19 TOP FIELD MODE
4 Acquire coordinate data for Reference "REF2" in
the same manner.
Enter/
Select PT#
{ENT}
ENTER REF2
PT#:
[P02_
DESC:
↑
↓
ALP
"REF1" to the direction of "REF2".
Enter
DISTANCE
m
CLR
ENTER DISTANCE
= 10.000_
6 Set with {ENT} key.
{ENT}
To select directions, press {F1} (LEFT) to move to
the left and {F2} (RIGHT) to the right.
8 Set with {ENT} key.
The conditions for calculating coordinate data will
be displayed.
Enter
OFFSET,
{F1} or
{F2}
{ENT}
REF2" display and "DISTANCE/OFFSET" display.
{F4}
R = 5.000_
LEFT RIGHT
REF1
REF2
After the coordinate data is calculated, the
procedure will move onto coordinate point/
description entries.
 The procedures below will be the same as the
ones for entering coordinates directly
(COORDINATE).
EDIT
m
CLR
]
]
↓
10.000 m
5.000 m
EDIT
↑
{F1}
ENTER NEW POINT:
PT#:
[_
]
DESC: [
]
ALP CLR
Enter PT#,
Enter
description
ENTER NEW POINT:
PT#:
[P03
]
DESC: [POINT_
]
ALP CLR
{ENT}
19-18
[P01
[P02
DIS:
R :
OK
10 Press {F1} (OK) to calculate coordinate data.
m
CLR
ENTER OFFSET
OK
9 {F4} (↑/↓) will allow the switching of the "REF1/
m
CLR
ENTER OFFSET
L = _
LEFT RIGHT
7 Enter the horizontal direction distance (OFFSET).
CLR
ENTER DISTANCE
= _
5 Enter the distance (DISTANCE) from reference
]
N [
E [
Z [
10.000 ]
5.000 ]
0.000 ]
ENTER
19 TOP FIELD MODE
 The calculated value will be displayed for the
coordinate data. Set with {ENT} key.
{ENT}
PT#:
JOB
[P03
STORED!
[JOB 1
]
]
1.COORDINATES
2.REFLINE
3.TAPE
[1] [2] [3]
 TAPE
END PT#
OFFSET
ADD POINT
START PT#
Operating procedure
Operation
Display
1.COORDINATES
2.REFLINE
3.TAPE
[1] [2] [3]
1 Select {F3} (TAPE).
2 In order to acquire coordinate data for reference
"START" point, select an existing coordinate point
with {F1} or {F2} (Arrow) key, or enter a coordinate
point directly.
3 Set with {ENT} key.
{F3}
ENTER START PT#
PT#:
[_
]
DESC:
↑
↓
ALP CLR
Enter/
Select PT#
ENTER START PT#
PT#:
[P01_
]
DESC:
↑
↓
ALP CLR
{ENT}
4 In order to acquire coordinate data for reference
"END" point, select an existing coordinate point
with {F1} or {F2} (Arrow) key, or enter a coordinate
point directly.
5 Set with {ENT} key.
Enter/
Select PT#
{ENT}
ENTER END PT#
PT#:
[_
DESC:
↑
↓
ALP
ENTER END PT#
PT#:
[P02_
DESC:
↑
↓
ALP
CLR
]
CLR
ENTER FROM END PT#
L = _
LEFT RIGHT
19-19
]
m
CLR
19 TOP FIELD MODE
6 Enter the horizontal distance (OFFSET) from
"END" point.
To select directions, press {F1} (LEFT) to move to
the left and {F2} (RIGHT) to the right.
7 Set with {ENT} key.
The conditions for calculating coordinate data will
be displayed.
8 Press {F1} (OK) to calculate coordinate data.
After the coordinate data is calculated, the
procedure will move onto coordinate point/
description entries.
 The procedures below will be the same as the
ones for entering coordinates directly
(COORDINATE).
 The calculated value will be displayed for the
coordinate data. Set with {ENT} key.
Enter
OFFSET,
{F1} or
{F2}
ENTER FROM END PT#
R = 5.000_
LEFT RIGHT
m
CLR
{ENT}
START [P01
]
END
[P02
]
R :
5.000 m
OK EDIT
↓
{F1}
ENTER NEW POINT:
PT#:
[_
]
DESC: [
]
ALP CLR
Enter PT#,
Enter
DESC
ENTER NEW POINT:
PT#:
[P03
]
DESC: [POINT_
]
ALP CLR
{ENT}
N [
E [
Z [
{ENT}
PT#:
JOB
10.000 ]
5.000 ]
0.000 ]
ENTER
[P03
STORED!
[JOB1
]
]
1.COORDINATES
2.REFLINE
3.TAPE
[1] [2] [3]
19.5.2To Delete Coordinate Data
Operating procedure
Operation
Display
1.ADD POINT
2.DELETE POINT
3.VIEW POINT
[1] [2] [3]
1 Select {F2} (DELETE POINT).
{F2}
1.DESIGN PT
2.MEASUREMENT PT
[1]
2 Select the type of data to delete.
{F1} (DESIGN PT)
•••••• Coordinate data entered directly and
recorded for addition of coordinates
{F2} (MEASUREMENT PT)
•••••• Coordinate data observed and recorded
through layout, TOPO, etc.
19-20
{F1}
or
{F2}
↓
[2]
ENTER PT TO DEL
PT#:
[_
]
DESC:
[
]
↑
↓
ALP CLR
19 TOP FIELD MODE
3 Select a coordinate point to delete with {F1} or
{F2} (Arrow) key, or enter a coordinate point
directly.
4 Set with {ENT} key.
5 When deleting data, there will be a verification
procedure. Selecting {F3} (YES) here will delete
the coordinate data selected.
Enter/
Select PT#
ENTER PT TO DEL
PT#:
[P01_
]
DESC:
[
]
↑
↓
ALP CLR
{ENT}
ENTER PT TO DEL
PT#:
[P01
]
DESC:
[
]
>OK ?
[YES][NO]
{F3}
POINT
DELETED!
1.DESIGN PT
2.MEASUREMENT PT
[1]
[2]
19.5.3To View Coordinate Data
Operating procedure
Operation
Display
1.ADD POINT
2.DELETE POINT
3.VIEW POINT
[1] [2] [3]
1 Select {F3} (VIEW POINT).
{F3}
1.DESIGN PT
2.MEASUREMENT PT
[1]
2 Select type of data to view.
{F1} (DESIGN PT)
•••••• Coordinate data entered directly and
recorded for addition of coordinates
{F2} (MEASUREMENT PT)
•••••• Coordinate data observed and recorded
through layout, TOPO, etc.
3 Select a coordinate point to view with {F1} or {F2}
(Arrow) key.
{F1}
or
{F2}
{F4}
point display.
{F4}
19-21
↓
↓
0.000 ]
0.000 ]
0.000 ]
PT#
DESIGN PT
PT#:
[P99
DESC: [POINT
↑
]
]
NEZ
]
]
NEZ
N [
E [
Z [
↑
5 Pressing {F4} (PT#) will return to the coordinate
↓
DESIGN PT
PT#:
[P99
DESC: [POINT
↑
4 To check the coordinate data, press {F4} (NEZ).
[2]
DESIGN PT
PT#:
[P01
DESC: [POINT
↑
Enter/
Select PT#
↓
↓
]
]
NEZ
19 TOP FIELD MODE
19.5.4To Edit Coordinate Data
Operating procedure
Operation
 Only entered coordinate data (design data) can
be edited.
Display
4.EDIT POINT
5.DATA TRANSFER
[4]
1 Select {F1} (EDIT POINT).
{F1}
2 Select a coordinate point to edit with {F1} or {F2}
(Arrow) key.
3 Switch to the editing mode by pressing {F3} (Edit)
key.
4 After editing the coordinate point and its
DESIGN PT
PT#:
[P01
DESC: [POINT
↑
↓
EDIT
]
]
NEZ
{F1} or
{F2}
DESIGN PT
PT#:
[P99
DESC: [POINT
↑
↓
EDIT
]
]
NEZ
{F3}
DESIGN PT
PT#:
[P99_
DESC: [POINT
ALP
]
]
CLR
DESIGN PT
PT#:
[PT-99
DESC: [POINT
↑
↓
EDIT
]
]
NEZ
Edit data
{ENT}
description, set with {ENT} key.
 Coordinate data can be edited with the editing
mode in the same manner.
N [
E [
Z [
↑
{F3}
19-22
↑
[5]
↓
0.000 ]
0.000 ]
0.000 ]
EDIT PT#
N [0.000_
E [0.000
Z [0.000
]
]
]
CLR
19 TOP FIELD MODE
19.5.5To Transfer Coordinate Data
Operating procedure
Operation
Display
4.EDIT POINT
5.DATA TRANSFER
[4]
1 Select {F2} (DATA TRANSFER).
{F2}
Data transfer corresponds to the following two
types of transmission formats:
F1: GTS FORMAT
F2: SSS FORMAT
[5]
↑
DATA TRANSFER
F1:GTS FORMAT
F2:SSS FORMAT
 Setting Transmission Protocol
Operating procedure
Operation
 Always check transmission protocol before
performing data transfer.
Display
DATA TRANSFER
F1:GTS FORMAT
F2:SSS FORMAT
1 Select the transmission format to use.
2 Select {F3} (COMM. PARAMETERS)
{F1}
or
{F2}
DATA TRANSFER
F1:SEND DATA
F2:LOAD DATA
F3:COMM. PARAMETERS
{F3}
COMM. PARAMETERS
F1:BAUD RATE
F2:CHAR./PARITY
F3:STOP BITS
Set items for transmission protocol are as follows according to the format.
 GTS FORMAT
Item
Selecting Item
Contents
[ACK/NAK],
[ONE WAY]
Setting Protocol
[ACK/NAK] or [ONE WAY] communication
Baud rate
1200, 2400, 4800,
9600, 19200, 38400
Setting transfer speed
1200/2400/4800/9600/19200/38400 baud
Char. / Parity
[7/EVEN], [7/ODD],
[8/NON]
Setting data length and parity.
[7bit, even], [7bit, odd], [8bit,none]
Protocol
Stop Bits
1, 2
Setting Stop 1 bit or 2bits
 SSS FORMAT
Item
Selecting Item
Contents
Baud rate
1200, 2400, 4800,
9600, 19200, 38400
Setting transfer speed
1200/2400/4800/9600/19200/38400 baud
Char. / Parity
[7/EVEN], [7/ODD],
[8/NON]
Setting data length and parity.
[7bit, even], [7bit, odd], [8bit,none]
Stop Bits
1, 2
Setting Stop 1 bit or 2bits
19-23
19 TOP FIELD MODE
 Receiving coordinate data
Operating procedure
Operation
Display
DATA TRANSFER
F1:GTS FORMAT
F2:SSS FORMAT
1 Select the transmission format used for receiving
data.
F1: GTS FORMAT
F2: SSS FORMAT
2 Select {F2} (LOAD DATA).
{F1}
or
{F2}
DATA TRANSFER
F1:SEND DATA
F2:LOAD DATA
F3:COMM. PARAMETERS
{F2}
LOAD COORD. DATA
>OK ?
--- --- [YES][NO]
3 Press {F3} (YES) to begin the coordinate data
{F3}
receiving process.
LOAD COORD. DATA
*
< Loading Data ! >
STOP
 Sending coordinate data
Operating procedure
Operation
Display
DATA TRANSFER
F1:GTS FORMAT
F2:SSS FORMAT
1 Select the transmission format used for receiving
data.
F1: GTS FORMAT
F2: SSS FORMAT
2 Select {F1} (SEND DATA).
{F1}
or
{F2}
DATA TRANSFER
F1:SEND DATA
F2:LOAD DATA
F3:COMM. PARAMETERS
{F1}
SEND COORD. DATA
>OK ?
--- --- [YES][NO]
3 Press {F3} (YES) to begin the coordinate data
{F3}
sending process.
19-24
SEND COORD. DATA
*
< Sending Data ! >
STOP
20 PRECAUTIONS
20
PRECAUTIONS
1) For transportation, hold by the handle or yoke of the instrument. Never hold by the lens barrel as it
can affect the fixing bracket inside and reduce the accuracy of the instrument.
2) Never expose the instrument without a filter to direct sunlight. It may damage the components
inside the instrument.
3) Never leave the instrument unprotected in high temperature. The temperature inside instrument
may easily reach up to 70°C or above and will reduce the service life.
4) The instrument should be stored in the room temperature range of minus 30°C to plus 60°C.
5) When a high degree of precision is required for measurement, provide shade against direct sunlight
for the instrument and tripod.
6) Any sudden change of temperature to the instrument or prism may result in a reduction of
measuring distance range, i.e. when taking the instrument out from a heated vehicle.
7) When opening the carrying case and taking out the instrument, place the case horizontally, then
open the case.
8) When returning the instrument to its case, be sure to match the white positioning marks provided
with the case and fit it correctly into the concave shape inside the case.
9) For transportation, provide dampening or a cushion appropriately to avoid sudden shock or
vibration.
10) For cleaning the instrument after use, remove dust using a cleaning brush, then wipe off with a
cloth.
11) Wipe off moisture completely if the instrument gets wet during survey work. Store the instrument in
a dry room where the temperature remains fairly constant.
12) For cleaning the lens surface, use a cleaning brush to remove the dust, then use a clean lintless
cotton cloth. Moisten it with alcohol (or mixture with ether) to wipe gently in a rotational motion from
the center out.
13) Even if any abnormality occurs, never attempt to disassemble or lubricate the instrument yourself.
Always consult with TOPCON or your dealer.
14) To remove the dust on the case, never use thinner or benzine. Use a clean cloth moistened with
neutral detergent.
15) Check each part of the tripod after extended use. Parts (screws or clamps) may work themselves
free.
20-1
21 SPECIAL ACCESSORIES
21
SPECIAL ACCESSORIES
The following are optional accessories which are sold separately from the ES.
Target and power supply optional accessories: see Section 22 “BATTERY SYSTEM”. and 23
“PRISM SYSTEM”.
 Plumb bob
The plumb bob can be used to set up and center the
instrument on days when there is little wind. To use the
plumb bob, unwind its cord, pass it through the cord grip
piece as shown in the figure to adjust its length, then
suspend it from the hook attached to the centering screw.
 Tubular compass (CP7)
Slide the tubular compass into the tubular compass slot,
loosen the clamp screw, then rotate the top part of the
instrument until the compass needle bisects the index lines.
The telescope's Face 1 sighting direction in this position will
indicate magnetic north. After use, tighten the clamp and
remove the compass from the slot.
Tubular
compass
slot

•
The tubular compass is susceptible to the influence of
nearby magnets or metal. Such influence could cause it to
fail to accurately indicate magnetic north. Do not use
magnetic north as indicated by this compass for base line
surveying.
 Telescope eyepiece lens (EL7)
Magnification : 40X
Field of view : 1° 20'
 Diagonal eyepiece (DE27)
The diagonal eyepiece is convenient for observations near
the nadir and in narrow spaces.
Magnification: 30X
After removing the handle from the ES, loosen the
attachment screw to remove the telescope eyepiece. Then
screw the diagonal lens into place.
Handle removal method: see Section 1.1
“Nomenclature”.
 Solar filter (OF3A)
When sighting targets where glare is present, solar
observations for example, attach it to the objective lens of
the ES to protect its interior and the eyes of the operator.
The filter part can be flipped up without being removed.
21-1
DE27
21 SPECIAL ACCESSORIES
 Carrying case (SC249T) & Carrying strap
This is a carrying case and strap set.
Attach the strap to the carrying case to shoulder the case.
 Interface cable
Connect between the ES and the host computer for data output.
Cable
DOC210
Notes
Pin Numbers and signal levels: RS-232C compatible
D-sub connector: 9pins (female)

•
By using the Y cable the ES can perform RS232C communication (D-sub 9-pin) at the same time
as connecting to an external power source.
21-2
22 BATTERY SYSTEM
22
BATTERY SYSTEM
Operate your ES with the following combinations of power equipment.

•
•
Be sure to carefully read the operating manuals for the battery and charger before operating.
Never use any combination other than those indicated below. If you do, the ES could be damaged.
•
Those indicated by * are standard accessories.
Battery
%'&&
Charger*
Power cable*
CDC68A
EDC113A/C
(110 to 240 VAC)
EDC113B
(110 to 125 VAC)
etc.
6%
BDC70

•
Dedicated power cables differ according to the country or the area where the instrument is used.
Contact your local dealer for the details.
22-1
23 PRISM SYSTEM
23
PRISM SYSTEM
Arrangement according to your needs is possible.
Target pole-2
Prism-2
Tilting prism
holder-3
Tilting prism holder-2
with target plate-2
Single prism
holder-2
Plug-4
Tribrach
adaptor-2
Pole adaptor- A
Pole adaptor- F2
Tribrach TR-102/103
Tribrach
adaptor-S2
Optical plummet tribrach TR-112
Tilt single prism unit
Tripod
•
•
Plug-4 is necessary for the tribrach adaptor-2, tribrach adaptor-S2 and pole adaptor-F2 to coincide
with the height of this series.
Use the above prisms after setting them at the same height as the instruments. To adjust the height
of prism set, change the position of fixing screws.
During a traverse observavtion, it is recommended to use the same type (tribrach-TR-102/103/112)
of tribrach for the target.
23-1
24 ERROR DISPLAYS
24
ERROR DISPLAYS
The following is a list of the error messages displayed by the instrument and the meaning of each
message.

•
•
There is a possibility that an unexpected error occasionally occurs when using an old battery. In such a
case, exchange it for a new battery, and please check the operation of the instrument.
If error still persist after attempting to clear them, contact your local dealer.
Error code
Description
Countermeasures
3 points
required
When area calculating, there are less than 3
points coordinate data in selected file.
Confirm the file data and calculate again.
The air is shimmering a lot, etc., measuring
conditions are poor.
The center of the target cannot be sighted.
BadCondition Unsuitable distance measurement conditions
when reflectorless measurement is set.
When reflectorless measurement is set,
distance cannot be measured because the
laser beam is striking at least two surfaces at
the same time.
Perform measurement again when
measuring condition becomes better.
Resight the target.
Choose a single surface target for distance
measurement.
CALC
ERROR
Calculation is impossible from the data input.
Confirm the input data.
DELETE
ERROR
When deleting coordinate data, it can not
be done successful.
Confirm the data and delete again.
SIGNAL
OFF
Measuring conditions are poor, and there is
not enough reflective light for measuring
distances.
Resight the target. When using reflective
prisms, effectiveness will be improved by
increasing the number of prisms used.
EDM error
Repair is required.
E35
Displayed when REM measurement carried
out to the range from zenith or nadir ±6°.
Operate in the range out of ± 6° from the
zenith or nadir.
E72
Displayed when Vertical angle -position is
adjusted in wrong position.
Repair is required.
E73
The instrument was not leveled when Vertical
angle 0-position is adjusted.
Level the instrument then carry the
adjustment work.
E80’s
Mainly at the time data transmission between
ES and external instrument.
Confirm operation procedure is correct or the
connection cables are correct.
E097
EDM device error
Repair is required.
Tilt error
Contact your local dealer.
Angle measurement error
Contact your local dealer.
EDM distance measurement time out error
If the same error message is repeated, repair
is required.
Communication with EDM is poor
If the same error message is repeated, repair
is required.
The same file name exists.
Use another file name.
E020’s,
E031, E033
E123, E124
E198
E201
E205
FILE
EXISTS
24-1
24 ERROR DISPLAYS
FULL
FILES
FAILED
INITIALIZE
LIMIT
OVER
When making a file, 30 files already exist.
If necessary, send or delete files.
Initializing can not be done successful.
Confirm initializing data and try to initialize
again.
Limit of input data exceeded.
Input again.
MEMORY
ERROR
Any abnormality occurs with internal memory. Initialize the internal memory.
MEMORY
POOR
Shortage of capacity of the internal memory.
Download data from internal memory to PC.
NO DATA
The data is not found in the search mode
Confirm the data and search again.
NO FILE
There is no file in internal memory.
If necessary, make files.
When using a file, no file is selected.
Confirm the file and select a file.
When in point to line measurement, the
horizontal distance between first point and
second point is within 1m.
The horizontal distance between first point
and second point must be more than 1m.
CIRCULAR
ERROR
Known points and occupied point are on the
same circle at the resection mode.
Take the different point.
PT# EXIST
Same new point name is already memorized
in the memory.
Confirm the new point name and input again.
PT# DOES
NOT EXIST
When you enter incorrect name or PT# does
not exist in the internal memory.
Enter the correct name or enter point in the
internal memory.
When setting a new point, calculation is
impossible from the measured data.
Measure again.
Read-only file on the USB flash drive cannot be
Remove the read -only attribute of the file on
your PC etc.
FILE NOT
SELECTED
P1-P2
distance
too short
RANGE
ERROR
READ ONLY changed and file contents cannot be deleted or
FILE
edited.
Temp
RangeOUT
Tilt Over
ES is outside useable temperature range and
accurate measurement cannot be performed.
Repeat measurement within the appropriate
temperature range. If the ES is used under
direct sunlight, use an umbrella to protect it
against the heat of the sun.
Instrument tilts over more than 3 minutes.
Level the instrument properly.
An error has occurred in loading or saving
data to USB flash drive.
Check if the USB flash drive is formatted to
FAT32.
USB ERROR
Insert the USB flash drive correctly.
If the error still occurs, use another USB flash
drive.
V ANGLE
ERROR
H ANGLE
ERROR
VH ANGLE
ERROR
Abnormality in angle measuring system.
24-2
If this error code continues to display, repair
is required.
25 REGULATIONS
25
REGULATIONS
Region/
Country
U.S.A.
Directives/
Regulations
FCC-Class A
Labels/Declarations
FCC Compliance
WARNING:
Changes or modifications to this unit not expressly approved by the party
responsible for compliance could void the user's authority to operate the
equipment.
Note:
This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a
Class A digital device pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits
are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference when the equipment is operated in a commercial environment.
This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy
and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instruction manual,
may cause harmful interference to radio communications. Operation of
this equipment in a residential area is likely to cause harmful interference
in which case the user will be required to correct the interference at his
own expense.
Means of conformity
This device complies with part 15 of the FCC Rules, Operation is subject
to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful
interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired operation.
This transmitter must not be co-located or operated in conjunction with
any other antenna or transmitter.
This equipment complies with FCC radiation exposure limits set forth for
an uncontrolled environment and meets the FCC radio frequency (RF)
Exposure Guidelines. This equipment has very low levels of RF energy
that it deemed to comply without maximum permissive exposure
evaluation (MPE). But it is desirable that it should be installed and
operated keeping the radiator at least 20cm or more away from person's
body.
California,
U.S.A.
Proposition 65
California,
U.S.A.
Perchlorate
Material
(CR Lithium
Battery)
http://www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate/
25-1
25 REGULATIONS
Region/
Country
Directives/
Regulations
California and
NY, U.S.A.
Recycling
Batteries
Canada
ICES-Class A
Labels/Declarations
This Class A digital apparatus meets all requirements of Canadian
Interference-Causing Equipment Regulations.
Cet appareil numérique de la Class A respecte toutes les exigences du
Réglement sur le matériel brouilleur du Canada.
This class A digital apparatus complies with Canadian ICES-003.
Cet appareil numerique de la classe A est conforme a la norme NMB003 du Canada.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may
not cause interference, and (2) this device must accept any
interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation
of this device.
This equipment complies with IC radiation exposure limits set forth for
an uncontrolled environment and meets the RSS-102 of the IC radio
frequency (RF) Exposure Guidelines. This equipment has very low
levels of RF energy that it deemed to comply without maximum
permissive exposure evaluation (MPE). But it is desirable that it should
be installed and operated keeping the radiator at least 20cm or more
away from person's body.
25-2
25 REGULATIONS
Region/
Country
EU
Directives/
Regulations
EMC-Class B
R&TTE-Class 1
Labels/Declarations
EMC NOTICE
In industrial locations or in proximity to industrial power installations, this
instrument might be affected by electromagnetic noise. Under such
conditions, please test the instrument performance before use.
This product complies with the electromagnetic environmental testing of
industrial locations.
Model:
ES series
Manufacturer
Name:
Address:
TOPCON CORPORATION
75-1, Hasunuma-cho, Itabashi-ku, Tokyo,
174-8580 JAPAN
Europe Representative and Importer
Name:
Topcon Europe Positioning B.V.
Address:
Essebaan 11, 2908 LJ Capelle a/d IJssel,
The Netherlands EU
WEEE
Directive
WEEE Directive
This symbol is applicable to EU members states only.
Following information is only for EU-member states:
The use of the symbol indicates that this product may not be treated as
household waste. By ensuring this product is disposed of correctly, you
will help prevent potential negative consequences for the environment
and human health, which could otherwise be caused by inappropriate
waste handling of this product. For more detailed information about the
take-back and recycling of this product, please contact your supplier
where you purchased the product or consult.
EU
EU Battery
Directive
EU Battery Directive
This symbol is applicable to EU members states only.
Battery users must not dispose of batteries as unsorted general waste,
but treat properly.
If a chemical symbol is printed beneath the symbol shown above,
this chemical symbol means that the battery or accumulator
contains a heavy metal at a certain concentration. This will be
indicated as follows:
Hg: mercury(0.0005%), Cd: cadmium(0.002%), Pb: lead(0.004%)
These ingredients may be seriously hazardous to human and
the global environment.
This product contains a coin cell.
You cannot replace batteries by yourself. When you need to replace
and/or dispose batteries, contact your local dealer.
25-3
26 SPECIFICATIONS
26
SPECIFICATIONS
Except where stated, the following specifications apply to all models of ES Series.
Telescope
Length:
Aperture:
Magnification:
Image:
Resolving power:
Field of view:
Minimum focus:
Focussing screw:
Reticle illumination:
171mm
45mm (EDM:48mm)
30X
Erect
2.5"
1°30'
1.3m
1 speed
5 brightness levels
Angle measurement
Horizontal and Vertical circles type:
Detecting
ES-62:
ES-65:
Angle units:
Minimum display:
Accuracy:
ES-62:
ES-65:
(ISO 17123-3: 2001)
Measuring time:
Collimation compensation:
Measuring mode:
Horizontal angle:
Vertical angle:
Rotary absolute encoder
2 sides
1 side
Degree/Gon/Mil (selectable)
1" (0.0002gon/0.01mil)/5" (0.0010gon/0.1mil) (selectable)
2" (0.0006gon/0.010mil)
5" (0.0015gon/0.025mil)
0.5 sec or less
On/Off (selectable)
Right/Left (selectable)
Zenith/Horizontal/Horizontal ±90° /% (selectable)
Tilt angle compensation
Type:
Minimum display:
Range of compensation:
Automatic compensator:
Compensation constant:
Liquid 2-axis tilt sensor
1"
±6' (±0.1111 gon)
ON (V & H/V)/OFF (selectable)
Can be changed
Distance Measurement
Measuring method:
Signal source:
Measuring range:
Coaxial phase shift measuring system
Red laser diode 690nm
Class 3R
(IEC60825-1 Ed. 3.0: 2014/ FDA CDRH 21CFR Part
1040.10 and 1040.11 (Complies with FDA performance
standards for laser products except for deviations
pursuant to Laser Notice No.50, dated June 24, 2007.))
(When the prism or reflective sheet is selected in Config
mode as target, the output is equivalent to Class 1).
(Using the following reflective prism/reflective sheet target
during normal atmospheric conditions.*1)
Reflective sheet RS90N-K*3:
1.3 to 500m (1,640ft)
1.3 to 300m (980ft)*2
Reflective sheet RS50N-K*3:
1.3 to 300m (980ft)
1.3 to 180m (590ft)*2
Reflective sheet RS10N-K*3:
1.3 to 100m (320ft)
1.3 to 60m (190ft)*2
Prism-2 X 1:
1.3 to 4,000m (13,120ft)*6
Prism-5:
1.3 to 500m (1,640ft)
26-1
26 SPECIFICATIONS
Reflectorless (White)*4 :
0.3 to 350m (1,140ft)
0.3 to 200m (650ft)*7
Reflectorless (Gray)*5 :
0.3 to 220m (720ft)
0.3 to 100m (320ft)*7
Minimum display:
Fine/Rapid measurement:
Tracking measurement:
Maximum slope
distance display:
Distance unit:
Accuracy:
(Using prism)
(Using reflective sheet target)*3
(Reflectorless (White))*4
(Reflectorless (Gray))*5
Measurement mode:
Measuring time:
Fine measurement:
Rapid measurement
Tracking measurement:
Atmospheric correction:
Temperature input range:
Pressure input range:
ppm input range:
Prism constant correction:
Earth curvature and refraction correction:
Scale factor setting:
Sea level correction:
*1:
*2:
*3:
*4:
*5:
0.001m (0.005ft / 1/8inch)
0.01m (0.02ft / 1inch)
Prism/ reflective sheet: 7,680m (25,190ft)
Reflectorless: 350m (1,140ft)
m/ft/inch (selectable)
Fine measurement:(2 + 2 ppm X D) mm
Rapid measurement:(5 + 2 ppm X D) mm
Fine measurement:(3 + 2 ppm X D) mm
Rapid measurement:(5 + 2 ppm X D) mm
Fine measurement:
(3 + 2ppm X D) mm (0.3 to 200m)
(5 + 10ppm X D) mm (over 200 to 350m)
Rapid measurement:
(6 + 2ppm X D) mm (0.3 to 200m)
(8 + 10ppm X D) mm (over 200 to 350m)
Fine measurement
(3 + 2ppm X D) mm (0.3 to 100m)
(5 + 10ppm X D) mm (over 100 to 170m)
(10 + 10ppm X D) mm (over 170 to 220m)
Rapid measurement:
(6 + 2ppm X D) mm (0.3 to 100m)
(8 + 10ppm X D) mm (over 100 to 170m)
(15 + 10ppm X D) mm (over 170 to 220m)
Fine measurement (single/repeat/average)/Rapid
measurement (single/repeat)/Tracking (selectable)
1.7 sec + every 0.9 sec.
1.4 sec + every 0.7 sec.
1.4 sec + every 0.3 sec.
-30 to 60°C (in 0.1°C step)/ -22 to 140°F (in 0.1°F step)
560 to 1,066 hPa (in 0.1 hPa step)
420 to 800 mmHg (in 0.1mmHg step)
16.5 to 31.5 inchHg (in 0.1inchHg step)
-999.9 to 999.9 ppm (in 0.1 ppm step)
-99.9 to 99.9 mm (in 0.1 mm step)
0 mm fixed for reflectorless measurement
No/Yes K=0.14/Yes K=0.20 (selectable)
0.5 to 2.0
No/Yes (selectable)
Slight haze, visibility about 20 km, sunny periods, weak scintillation.
Measurement at 50 to 60°C (122 to 140°F)
Figures when the laser beam strikes within 30° of the reflective sheet target.
Figures when using Kodak Gray Card White side (reflection factor 90%) and brightness level is
less than 30000 lx (a little cloudy).
Figures when using Kodak Gray Card Gray side (reflection factor 18%) and brightness level is
less than 30000 lx (a little cloudy).
26-2
26 SPECIFICATIONS
*4,*5: When performing reflectorless measurement, the possible measurement range and precision will
change depending on the target reflection factor, weather conditions and location conditions.
*6: Face the prism toward the instrument during the measurement with the distance at 10 m or less.
*7: At the time of the tracking measurement.
Internal memory
Capacity
10,000 measurement points
External memory
USB flash memory (up to 8 GB)
Data transfer
Data input/output
USB
Asynchronous serial, RS232C compatible
USB Revision 2.0 (FS), Host (Type A), Only a USB flash
drive is compatible.
Bluetooth wireless technology (Option)*8
Transmission method:
Modulation:
Frequency band:
Bluetooth profile
Power class
Usable range
Authentication:
*8:
FHSS
GFSK (Gaussian-filtered frequency shift keying)
2.402 to 2.48GHz
SPP, DUN
Class 1
about 10m (No obstacles, few vehicles or sources of
radio emissions/interference in the near vicinity of the
instrument, no rain)
Yes/No (selectable)
Bluetooth function may not be built in depending on telecommunications regulations of the
country or the area where the instrument is purchased. Contact your local dealer for the details.
Power Supply
Power source:
Rechargeable Li-ion battery BDC46C
Working duration at 20 °C:
Distance and angle measurement (Fine single measurement = every 30 sec.):
BDC46C:
about 15 hours
BDC70 (optional accessory):
about 36 hours
Battery state indicator:
4 levels
Auto power-off:
2 levels (30 min/Not set) (selectable)
Charging time at 25 °C (using CDC68A):
BDC46C:
about 2.5 hours
BDC70 (optional accessory):
about 5.5hours
Battery (BDC46C)
Nominal voltage
Capacity
Dimensions
Weight
7.2V
2430mAh
38 (W) x 70 (D) x 20 (H) mm
about 103g
Battery (BDC70: optional accessory)
Nominal voltage
Capacity
Dimensions
Weight
7.2V
5240mAh
40 (W) x 70 (D) x 40 (H) mm
about 197g
Charger (CDC68A)
Input voltage:
AC100 to 240V
Charging time per battery (at 25°C):
BDC46C:
about 2.5 hours
BDC70 (optional accessory):
about 5.5 hours
(Charging can take longer than the times stated above
when temperatures are either especially high or low.)
Charging temperature range:
0 to 40°C
26-3
26 SPECIFICATIONS
Storage temperature range:
Size:
Weight:
-20 to 65°C
94 (W) X 102 (D) X 36 (H) mm
about 170g
General
Display unit:
ES-62:
ES-65:
Operation panel (keyboard):
Laser-pointer function:
Internal memory:
Sensitivity of levels:
Circular level:
Electronic Circular levels:
Graphic display range
Digital display range
Optical plummet:
Image:
Magnification:
Minimum focus:
Laser plummet (option):
Signal source:
Beam accuracy:
Spot diameter:
Brightness control:
Auto power-off
LCD graphic display, 192 dots X 80 dots
1 LCD graphic display on each face with illuminator
1 LCD graphic display with illuminator
25 keys (soft function, operations, power on, light) with
illuminator
Provided On/Off (selectable)
1MB (about 10,000 points)
10'/2 mm
6’ (inner circle)
±6’ 30"
Erect
3X
0.3 m
Red laser diode 635 ±10nm (Class 2 IEC60825-1 Ed.
3.0:2014/FDA CDRH 21CFR Part 1040.10 and 1040.11
(Complies with FDA performance standards for laser
products except for deviations pursuant to Laser Notice
No.50, dated June 24, 2007.))
1mm or less (when tripod head height is 1.3m).
ø3mm or less
5 levels
Provided (power cut off after 5 minutes)
Operating temperature (no condensation): -20 to 60 °C (-4 to 140 °F) *9
Storage temperature range (no condensation):-30 to 70 °C (-22 to 158 °F)
Dust and water resistance:
IP66 (IEC 60529: 2001)
Instrument height:
192.5 mm from tribrach mounting surface
236mm +5/-3mm from tribrach bottom
Size (with handle):
ES-62:
191 (W) X 181 (D) X 348 (H) mm
ES-65:
191 (W) X 174 (D) X 348 (H) mm
Weight (with handle and battery):
5.4kg (11.9lb)
*9:
No direct sunlight for using high temparatures of 50 to 60 °C (122 to 140 °F).
26-4
APPENDIX
1
Target for Laser plummet adjustment
Target for Laser plummet adjustment
Target for Laser plummet adjustment
5mm
Target for Laser plummet adjustment
5mm
Target for Laser plummet adjustment
5mm
Target for Laser plummet adjustment
5mm
Target for Laser plummet adjustment
5mm
Target for Laser plummet adjustment
5mm
Target for Laser plummet adjustment
5mm
APPENDIX-1
5mm
http://www.topcon.co.jp
Please see the attached address list or the following website for contact addresses.
GLOBAL GATEWAY http://global.topcon.com/
©2016 TOPCON CORPORATION
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
Was this manual useful for you? yes no
Thank you for your participation!

* Your assessment is very important for improving the work of artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project

Download PDF

advertisement